You are on page 1of 231

DM-XM2 E

SERVICE MANUAL
DM-XM2 E
Video Product
No. D17-6813 Digital Video Camera
PAL
CANON INC. 2002
Canon Inc.
Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.
First Edition : July. 2002
First Print : July. 2002
C
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
CONTENTS
1. Product Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-1 Main Features------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-2 Functions and performance Comparison Chart ---------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
2. Technical explanation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
2-1 Design --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
2-2 4x density pixel arrangement process -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
2-3 Audio --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
2-4 Title Mix ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-12
3. Main specifications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-14
4. Performance and functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-15
5. External View ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-26
6. System diagram ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-27
7. Overview of viewfinder/LCD Panel displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-28
7-1 Camera mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-28
7-2 VCR mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-35
7-3 Camera/card mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-38
7-4 Card playback mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-40
7-5 Menu display ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-41
7-5-1 Camera mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-41
7-5-2 VCR mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-45
7-5-3 Card/Camera mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-47
7-5-4 Card Playback mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-50
7-6 Card-related screen displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-52
7-6-1 Card image check screen --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-52
7-6-2 Side show screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-52
7-6-3 Index screen------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-53
7-6-4 Image Protect screen-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-53
7-6-5 Print mark screen------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-53
7-6-6 Card execution/Copy screen ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-54
7-6-7 Card execution/Image erase screen --------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-54
7-6-8 Format screen ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-55
7-6-9 Title mix selection screen -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-56
7-6-10 Title mix screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-57
7-6-11 Title erase screen ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-57
7-6-12 Title erase screen ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-57
7-6-13 Title protect screen -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-57
7-7 Bitmap display----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-58
7-8 Warning displays -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-60
7-9 LCD indicators ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-62
8. Backing up various data ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-63
8-1 Active memory (EEPROM, mechanical) ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-63
8-2 Backup by main power supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-63
8-3 Backup by main power supply or backup power supply (lithium button primary battery) ------------- 1-63
8-4 Backup conditions related to switching actions --------------------------------------------------------------- 1-63
8-4-1 Turning off the power (Camera mode) ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-63
8-4-2 Switching Program AE modes -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-65
9. Other features ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -1-68
9-1 Enabled and disabled settings in Program AE mode and Camera mode ---------------------------------- 1-68
9-1-1 Enabled and disabled settings in Program AE mode and Switches on camera ------------------- 1-69
9-2 Enabled and disabled settings in Program AE and Switches ------------------------------------------------ 1-70
9-3 System data displays ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-70
9-4 EVF display -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-70
9-5 Support for analog signal I/O copyright protection signals ------------------------------------------------- 1-71
9-6 Video ID1 detection/output support ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-71
9-7 Closed caption detection and output ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-71
9-8 Custom keys ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-72
9-9 Custom presets ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-72
9-10 DV control -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-73
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-1
1. Product Overview
This product is a 3CCD camcorder that replaces the DM-XM1 E models. It features a 440,000-pixel CCD and 4x
density pixel arrangement for providing the highest image quality for motion video and still images available in a
commercial product.
The high-quality adjustment function, color bar, and manual volume adjustment function found in the XL1s were also
added to create a high-end product appealing to a wider user base than the
DM-XM1 E, ranging from skilled amateurs to professionals.
1-1 Main Features
High-magnification and
high-performance lens
Enhanced still-image
functions
SD memory card/MultiMedia
card compatible
Records 1.68-million-pixel still
images
USB port
High-performance functions for business users
Manual audio function
Advanced accessory shoe for XLR microphone adapter
Custom presets
Color bar
And other features
Finest image quality available in a consumer
camera
New 1/4-inch 3CCD next-generation system
410,000-pixel CCD and 4x density pixel arrangement
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-2
• Next-Generation 3CCD System
• Outstanding Performance Features for Business Users
♦ Manual audio function
♦ Custom presets
♦ Interval timer
♦ Slow shutter
♦ 16:9 marker
♦ Zebra pattern level settings
♦ Power Save mode
♦ Displayed text recording
♦ Advanced accessory shoe for XLR
microphone adapter
♦ Color bar
♦ Clear scan
♦ Gain settings
♦ Display selector within viewfinder
(change from two to three positions)
♦ Variable grip zoom speed
♦ DV control function
♦ Index images and search function
♦ Custom keys
1/4-inch CCD with 300,000 ef fective pi xels
DM-XM1 E
2x density pixel arrangement (horizontal pixel shift only)
1/2 pixel
1/4-inch CCD with 440,000 ef fective pixels
DM-XM2 E
4x density pixel arrangement process (horizontal pixel shift + vertical pixel shift)
Motion video: Horizontal resolution of approx. 540 TV lines
Still image: 1.68 million pixels recorded
1/2 pixel
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-3
• New Accessory
MA-300 Microphone Adapter
Advanced accessory shoe type
Including 2-channel XLR terminal
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-4
1-2 Functions and performance Comparison Chart
Item XM1 XM2 (This product)
Camera
Shooting Motion video Tape Tape
functions Still image Tape (Photo) Tape (Photo), memory card
(Progressive Photo)
Image Image size 1/4-inch 3CCD 1/4-inch 3CCD
sensing Total number of Total pixels: 320,000 Total pixels: 470,000
device pixels (per CCD) Effective pixels: 300,000 Effective pixels: 440,000
System 3-plate Pixel shift (horizontal) 3-plate Pixel shift
(horizontal, vertical)
Filter RGB independent primary color filter RGB independent primary color filter
(dichroic prism) (dichroic prism)
Lens Optical zoom 20 × (12 elements in 10 groups with ←
magnification one fluorite lens and two aspheric lenses)
Digital zoom 40 ×, 100 × 40 ×, 100 × (Card mode: None)
magnification
Focal length 4.2-84 mm ←
(optical zoom)
(35 mm equivalent) 39.5-790 mm ←
F-number F1.6-2.9 With tape: F1.6-2.9
With memory card: F2.0-2.9
Aperture leaves Iris diaphragm (6 leaves) Iris diaphragm (5 leaves)
ND filter K K
(Transmittance: Approx. 16% with (Transmittance: Approx. 10% with 3
2.7 aperture) aperture)
Zoom Handle 3-level adjustable (H/M/L) ←
speed zoom
Grip Multi-level adjustable speed Variable H/M/L
zoom
Filter diameter φ 58mm P0.75 ←
Minimum illumination 6 lx (During auto mode) 0.37 lx (Slow shutter : 1/6 second)
Image stabilization Optical system (double-driving VAP) ←
Shooting functions
Program AE Easy Recording Easy Recording
Auto mode Auto mode
Spotlight mode Spotlight mode
Surf & Snow mode Surf & Snow mode
Tv mode Tv mode
Av mode Av mode
Manual mode Manual mode
Photometric Center-bottom-weighted and peak Center-bottom-weighted
Photometry
system Photometric
Evaluative 56 segments 80 segments
photometry
Exposure AE lock K ←
adjustment Exposure K (after AE lock) ←
correction
AE shift K (±2 levels) ←
Gain setting K (During manual mode) ←
Back light × ←
correction
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-5
Item GL1 GL2 (This product)
Shutter speed High- Tape 9 levels (1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 9 levels (1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
speed 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/8000, 1/16000) 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/8000, 1/16000)
shutter During manual mode: 27 steps During manual mode: 27 steps
Card × Tv mode: 1/50 to 1/500
Manual mode: 1/50 to 1/700
Slow shutter × 3 levels (1/25, 1/12, 1/6)
Aperture value F1.6, F2, F2.4, F2.8, F3.4, F4, F4.8, F5.6, F1.6, F2, F2.4, F2.8, F3.4, F4, F4.8, F5.6,
F6.7, F8, F9.5, F11 F6.7, F8 (F2.8-F8 is telephoto end)
(F2.8-F11 is telephoto end) Manual mode: 19 steps + CLOSE
Manual mode: 23 steps + CLOSE (Step 17 (Step 13 level is telephoto end + CLOSE)
level is telephoto end + CLOSE) Card mode: F2, F2.4, F2.8, F3.4, F4, F4.8
F5.6, F6.7, F8
Manual mode: 17 steps + CLOSE
(Step 13 level is telephoto end + CLOSE)
Image quality Color gain × (Custom preset)
adjustment adjustment
Hue adjustment K (±6 steps (±10)) (Custom preset)
Sharpness K (Custom preset)
adjustment
Setup adjustment × (Custom preset)
WB Auto K ←
Set K (1pc) ←
Preset Outdoor, indoor ←
Systems TTL, 49 segments TTL : 80 segments
Focus Mode AF/MF ←
Manual focus Focus ring operation ←
16:9 Recording system Vertical stretching ←
Area marker × Area marker displayed for 16:9
display in EVF 4:3 screen
Shooting D. effects Black and White, Slim, Stretch, Black and White, Sepia, Art, Strobe,
effects Strobe (0.5-second intervals) Mirror, Mosaic, Tracer (tape)
D. fade White (black) auto fade White (black) auto fade, wipe,
overlap (tape)
Zebra pattern K (Level fixed at 95%) (Variable level: 80% 85% 90% 95%
100%)
Movie video Mode Tape Normal/Frame (simulated frame ←
shooting process using pixel shift)
Card × ←
Clear scan × (Tv mode, M mode: 50.3-200 Hz)
Still image Mode Tape Normal (field image) ←
shooting Card × Progressive (iris shutter)
Single Tape 6.5 seconds ←
pictures Card × ←
Continuous Tape × ←
pictures Card × ←
PHOTO USE Dedicated still image button (tape) Dedicated still image button (tape, card)
buttons Pressed K (only during recording standby) ←
halfway
down
: New functions
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-6
Item GL1 GL2 (This product)
Still image Flash compatibility K 220EX, 380EX, 550EX K 220EX, (380EX), 420EX, 550EX
shooting Recorded video Frame image ←
(video output is field image)
Frame processing Simulated frame Simulated frame
(horizontal pixel shift) (horizontal and vertical pixel shift)
Wide shooting Tape K ←
(vertical
Card × ←
extension)
Negative-positive reversal × ←
Interval timer × (Interval time: 4 modes, Recording
time: 4 modes)
Self-timer 10 seconds/Remote controller: 2 seconds ←
REC Search K ←
REC Review K ←
Standby switch × K
Power save (after five minutes in Power shutoff Power shutoff/VCR (drum) stop
Recording Pause)
Displayed text recording ×
Audio
Audio 16-bit 2-channel (48 kHz) ←
12-bit 4-channel (32 kHz)
Wind screen K (ON/OFF) (Microphone F characteristics:
Normal/Voice/Wind Screen)
Recording level adjustment Auto only Auto, manual (L/R controls with
level adjustment dials)
Level meter × (EVF, inside LCD monitor, LCD
information display)
EVF Size 0.55-inch (TFT color) 0.44-inch (TFT color)
Pixels 180,000 ←
Brightness K (EVF BRIGHT dial adjustment) K (Menu adjustment)
adjustment
Color adjustment × ←
Movable Downward 68° up to horizontal ←
Monitor LCD Size 2.5-inch ←
Pixels 122,000 200,000
Brightness K ←
adjustment
Movable K ←
VCR
Playback Fast forward 25x speed 30x speed
system Rewind 25x speed 30x speed
Frame playback Forward/Reverse ←
Slow playback Forward/Reverse ←
2× SP playback Forward/Reverse ←
1× SP playback Forward/Reverse ←
Cue/review 11.5× speed ←
: New functions
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-7
Item GL1 GL2 (This product)
Search Photo search K ←
Date search ×
Index search ×
Playback D. effects × ×
effects D. fade × ×
Data code display Time and date display, camera information ←
Audio dubbing K ←
AV Insert K ←
Zero Set Memory K ←
Editing Recorder settings K ×
functions Simple dubbing K (Cut-in and cut-out) ×
Timing adjustment K ×
System
Interface Microphone input K ←
(terminal) Headphone output K ←
DV terminal K (I/O) ←
S terminal K (I/O) ←
AV terminal φ 3.5 mm (I/O) ←
Editing terminals LANC terminal ←
USB port × mini-B/ Complies with mass storage
class 1.0
Memory Card × SD memory card and MultiMedia card
card Still image Image × 1488 × 1128, 640 × 480 pixels
recording size
Image × Fine, Standard
quality
Card mix × ←
Stitch × ←
function
Still image Slideshow × K
playback Card jump × K
Title Creation × Camera shooting
image Title size × 640 × 480 pixels
Title mix × (Color selection (full color, _8 color),
mixed level variation)
Color bar × (EBU color bar)
Analog to DV signal conversion ×
Direct print × ←
World clock K ←
Text titles × ←
Speaker K ←
Confirmation beep K ←
: New functions
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-8
Item GL1 GL2 (This product)
Tally light K ←
Remote control code × (Remote control ON/OFF) , ,
Accessory shoe K (Compatibility with EX flashes) K (Compatibility with advanced shoe
and EX flashes)
Video ID × (ID1)
Recording LP K ←
modes SDL × ←
Custom keys × (1 key)
DV control × (Allowed only during Camera mode)
Internal battery charging × ←
Backup power Lithium button battery (CR2025) ←
Battery pack power 900 series lithium secondary battery ←
: New functions
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-9
2. Technical explanation
2-1 Design
Styling
• Conversion of the hard image of the DM-XM2E A to a softer and sleeker image
• Integrated form flowing from the lens barrel to the LCD
• Simple structure based on two-tone coloring that matches the molding
• Red is left as the high-profile accent color and used for the area around the level meter
• Hood design incorporating the camera body image
Ease of operation
• DM-XM2E A button layout is left and functionality is enhanced
• Grip shape that fits naturally in the hand
• Slimmer body width for reducing the moment
• Comfortable handle holding
• Handle bottom shaped to fit the inside of the fingers
• Key-top-shape for allowing usage with looking through the viewfinder
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-10
2-2 4x density pixel arrangement process
This camera incorporates separate CCDs using the 2x density pixel arrangement process for each of the
three primary colors (red, green, and blue) of light. The light signals captured by the three CCDs then undergo
separate processing for movies or still images. This camera uses new camera signal processing technology
for achieving a horizontal resolution of approximately 540 lines when recording DV movies. The camera uses
Canon’s 4x density pixel arrangement process for recording still images on cards. Shifting this information in
the three CCDs by one-half pitch in the vertical and horizontal directions effectively doubles the number of
pixels in each direction for providing a microscopic cell pitch exceeding even SXGA size at 1360 pixels in the
horizontal direction. The result is a highly-detailed megapixel still image.
Pixel
Pixel
DM-XM1 E DM-XM2 E
CCD total number of pixels 320,000 pixels x3 470,000 pixels x3
CCD effective number of pixels 300,000 pixels x3 440,000 pixels x3
CCD pixel arrangement Double-density pixel arrangement 4 times Double-density pixel arrangement
(Horizontal pixel shift only) (Horizontal pixel shift + vertical pixel shift)
During recording to tape 440,000 pixels (768H x 494V)
During recording to card 1680,000 pixels (1488H x 1128V)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-11
NOR
RESPONSE
Main Dark Noise
Band (inside dotted line)
VOICE
WIND
Voice Band
(inside the solid line)
0
-10
-20
100 200 f [Hz]
2-3 Audio
1.Microphone configuration
In this product, the microphone configuration from the DM-GL1 A is used. It uses a cross-layout configuration with
four elements.
The polar patterns and other settings are also identical to the DM-GL1 A.
2.Frequency characteristics selector function for built-in microphone
• Purpose of function
The DM-GL1 A, the predecessor of this product, used settings that expanded the frequency characteristics to the low
ranges for powerful sound pickup.
As a result of these settings, this microphone was well-known in the market for its superior quality. In some
cases, however, there were problems, such as people’s voices being inaudible.
The cause of this problem was that the expanded low ranges resulted in high-sensitivity sound pickup of the
surrounding dark noise (environmental noise such as the low-band component of air-conditioners) so that the
voices became faint by comparison.
To remedy this problem, this product expanded the frequency characteristics of the built-in microphone from two
levels (Wind Cut ON/OFF) to three levels (Normal, VOICE, Wind Cut). In this configuration, the DM-GL1 A
frequency
characteristics are kept as a single mode and a new VOICE mode was added specifically for picking up
voices and reducing the surrounding dark noise level.
• This mode’s operating method is presented below.
Although the DM-GL1 A settings allows powerful sound pickup in low ranges, if sound is picked up in an
environment where dark noise is distributed at high levels as shown in the figure above, the main bands of
air-conditioners and other dark noise are distributed to the low ranges so that the dark noise is recorded at a
high level and the voices become faint.
To remedy this problem, three modes can be selected in this product according to the usage conditions.
NORMAL : This mode records powerful audio by expanding the sound pickup band to the low ranges.
VOICE : Primarily for sound pickup of voices, this mode reduces the dark noise distributed in the low
ranges for recording clearer audio.
WIND CUT : Under windy conditions, this mode records audio by reducing the wind noise.
3.Manual volume function
The configuration is identical to the STB and XL1S.
4.Audio level LCD indicators
The configuration is identical to the STB and XL1S.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-12
2-4 Title Mix
Usually, cameras installed with memory cards are used not only for recording still images on memory cards.
They also include “Card Chroma key”, “Card Lumi. key”, and “Camera Chroma key” as card mix functions so that
users could enjoy making their own title creations. In the card mix functions, the camera image is inserted into the blue
section of the card image (Card Chroma key), the camera image is inserted into the white section of the card image
(Card Lumi. key), or the card image is inserted into the blue section of the camera image (Camera Chroma key).
However, the section to be mixed must be set to blue if mixed using Chroma key, or set to white if mixed using Lumi.
key Rather than allowing the creation of title images by the user himself, these methods were limited to the sample
image applications in the memory card.
This product title mix function allows images to be inserted easily by simply using the camera to capture logo marks or
pictures drawn by children as titles or one-point marks and recording them in the memory card as title images. Although this
title mix function is basically identical to the digital title mix function included with 8-mm video cameras, it has enhanced
ease of operation and higher image quality. In particular, since the title image is temporarily stored in the memory, any user-
selected adjustments such as Mix Level or Color selection can be made. Also, once the desired title image is made, it can be
stored on the memory card so that it can be used at any time and even by another this product.
Title image Camera image Title mix
Title image (Inverse) Camera image Title mix
1. Create title image
Original image (color)
a. When “Color selection” is set
Full color Black Blue Green
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-13
Cyan Red Magenta Yellow
White Inverse: Full color Inverse: Black Inverse: Blue
Inverse: Green Inverse: White Inverse: Full color
b. Mix level function (when in the full color state)
* Before the title image is stored in the card, the Mix Level and Color selection adjustments can be repeated.
(However, if the power is turned off, any title images stored in the temporary memory will be lost.)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-14
3. Main specifications
Model : DM-XM2 E (PAL model)
Systems
Recording system Two rotating heads, helical scan azimuth recording
Signal system Complies with PAL system
Video signal recording system Digital component recording
Audio signal recording system PCM digital recording
16-bit, 48 kHz, 2-channel; 12-bit, 32 kHz, 4-channel
(stereo 1 and 2)
Compatible video cassettes Mini DV cassettes with DV mark
Tape speed Approx. 18.83 mm/second (SP mode), approx. 12.57 mm/second (LP mode)
Recording/playing time 80 minutes (in SP mode using 80-minute tape),
120 minutes (in LP mode using 80-minute tape)
Fast-forward/reverse time Approx. 2 minutes and 20 seconds (using 60-minute tape)
Image sensing device 1/4-inch 3CCD
Total number of pixels: Approx. 470,000 × 3
RGB independent primary color filter (dichroic prism)
Number of effective pixels: Approx. 44`0,000 × 3
Viewfinder 0.44-inch TFT color LCD, approx. 180,000 pixels RGB delta arrangement
LCD monitor 2.5-inch TFT color LCD; approx. 200,000 pixels
Microphone Cross-layout stereo using four electret condenser microphones
Lens 20× lens f = 4.2 to 84 mm F1.6 to 2.9
12 elements in 10 groups (using one fluorite lens and two aspheric lenses)
Image stabilization Optical image stabilization and angular velocity sensing
Focus adjustment TTL TV-AF system and manually adjustable using focus ring
Minimum object distance 10 mm (wide end), 1 m (full zoom area)
Color temperature switching Automatic tracking WB, set/preset function included
Minimum subject illumination Approx. 0.37 lx (During 1/8-second slow shutter)
Recommended subject illumination Approx. 100 lx or higher
Subject illumination range Approx. 0.37 lx to approx. 100,000 lx
Aperture Iris diaphragm, Servo
I/O terminals (level/impedance)
DV terminal Special 4-pin connector (IEEE1394 compatible for both input and output)
S-Video terminal 4-pin Mini DIN for both input and output
Brightness + synchronization signal: 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Color signal (color burst): 0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω
Video terminal φ 3.5 mm AV mini-jack (for both input and output, also serves as audio terminal)
1 Vp-p/75 Ω unbalanced, synchronization negative
Audio terminal φ 3.5 mm AV mini-jack (for both input and output, also serves as video terminal)
Audio input 0 dBv (with 47 kΩ load)/47 kΩ (LINE ATT), φ10 dBv (with 47 kΩ load)/47 kΩ (LINE)
Audio output 4 dBm (with 47 kΩ load) /3 kΩ or less, unbalanced
Microphone input terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
-35 dBv (using 600 Ω microphone)/5.6 kΩ (MIC ATT)
-55 dBv (using 600 Ω microphone)/5.6 kΩ (MIC)
Microphone power supply terminal φ 2.5 mm mini mini-jack (DC 5V)
Headphone terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
-25 dBv (with 16 Ω load)/120 Ω
USB port 5-pin connector (mini-B Receptacle)
DC output terminal φ 2.5 mm mini mini-jack (DC 5V)
Accessory shoe Compatible with advanced accessory shoe and E-TTL flashes
Editing (LANC) terminal φ 2.5 mm mini mini-jack
Power, etc.
Power supply DC 7.2 V
Power consumption Approx. 4.8 W (using EVF), approx. 5.7 W (LCD monitor)
(during recording/AF focusing)
Operating temperature 0 to 40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 118 × 136 × 306 mm (except for small protrusions)
(Approx. 4 5/8 × 5 3/8 × 12 in)
Weight Camcorder alone: Approx. 1.12 kg (2 lb 7 1/2 oz)
Total equipped weight: Approx. 1.27 kg (2 lb 12 3/4 oz)
(includes BP-915, lens hood, lens cap, DVM-E30 and lithium button battery)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-15
4. Performance and functions
DM-XM2 E
4.1 Type VCR-integrated camera
4.2 Recording system Rotating two-head helical scan azimuth recording
Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)
Complies with NTSC system (625 lines, 50 fields)
4.2.1 Video signal recording system Digital component recording
Sampling frequency Y = 13.5 MHz
R-Y, B-Y = 6.75 MHz
Quantized bits 8 bits
4.2.2 Audio signal recording system PCM digital recording
16-bit: 48 kHz 2ch
12-bit: 32 kHz 4ch
(Stereo 1 and 2)
4.2.3 Tracking 2-frequency pilot system
4.2.4 Tape speed Approx. 18.83 mm/second (in SP mode)
Approx. 12.57 mm/second (in LP mode)
4.2.5 Head drum
Drum diameter φ 21.7 mm
Rpms 9000 rotations/minute
Heads Video heads: 2
4.3 Recording/playback time 80 minutes maximum (in SP mode)
(using 80-minute tape) 120 minutes maximum (in LP mode)
Continuous recording/actual recording time and continuous playback time using battery
Recording (EVF) Recording (LCD) Playback (LCD)
BP-915 Approx. 120 minutes/approx. 65minutes Approx. 95 minutes/approx. 55 minutes Approx. 105 minutes
BP-930 Approx. 280 minutes/approx. 155 minutes Approx. 235 minutes/approx. 135 minutes Approx. 255 minutes
BP-945 Approx. 420 minutes/approx. 235 minutes Approx. 355 minutes/approx. 205 minutes Approx. 385 minutes
4.4 Cassette tape specifications Mini DVC specs
4.4.1 Tape type Vapor-deposited metal tape
4.4.2 Tape width 6.35 mm vapor-deposited metal tape
4.4.3 Tape thickness 7µm
4.5 Camera
4.5.1 Image sensing device 1/4-inch interlaced CCD × 3
1. Pixels Total pixels: Approx. 470,000 × 3 (795(H) × 595 (V) × 3)
Effective pixels: Approx. 440,000 × 3 (752(H) × 582 (V) × 3)
2. Filter Prism + dichroic filter
3. Signal configuration PAL standard color TV signal
4. Scanning system 625 lines, 50 fields/25 frames
5. Minimum subject illumination Approx. 0.37 lx (During 1/6-second Tv mode and Manual mode)
Approx. 3 lx (Auto mode)
6. Subject illumination range Approx. 0.37 lx to approx. 100,000 lx
(During Tv mode and Manual mode)
4.5.2 Photo lens
1. Nominal focal length 4.2 to 84 mm (35mm film equivalent: approx. 39.5 to 790 mm)
2. Optical zoom 20x
3. Nominal F number F1.6 to F2.9
4. Lens configuration 12 elements in 10 groups (using one fluorite lens and two aspheric lenses)
5. Focus adjustment Inner focus type, manually adjustable (adjusted by turning focus ring)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-16
6. Minimum object distance Wide end: 10 mm, middle range: 1m, tele end: 1m
(from lens tip)
7. Power zoom Grip zoom Multi-level variable-speed zoom (Approx. 4 to 30 seconds, during digital zoom: Approx. 5.5 to 38
seconds (during tape recording only)/Three fixed speeds (H/M/L))
Handle zoom Three fixed speeds (H/M/L)
8. Aperture Iris diaphragm (5 leaves)
9. Macro mechanism Wide end macro
Macro shooting distance 10 mm (from lens front)
10. ND filter Built-in Transmittance: Approx. 10% (equivalent to approx. 3 apertures)
11. Filter diameter 58 mm P0.75
12. Lens hood Included Specially-designed removable bayonet-square hood
13. Lens cap Screw-on type
4.5.3 Digital zoom 40x, 100x (with tape only) (35 mm film equivalent: approx. 1,580 mm and 3,950 mm)
4.5.4 Image stabilization function
1. System Optical image stabilization (double-driving variangle prism system)
2. Sensing system Angular velocity sensing (using piezoelectric vibration sensor)
4.5.5 Shooting modes
1. Motion Video mode Motion video mode (Start and Stop button operation), Still Image mode (Photo button operation)
Normal video and Frame video on tape when using tape mode (although there is a slight stiffness when
shooting a moving subject, playback of still images provides crystal-clear video without flicker)
2. Still Image mode Approx. 6.5-second still image recording on tape when using tape mode (field image: simulated frame
processing by vertical pixel shift), still image (Progressive Photo) can be recorded on an SD Memory
card or MultiMedia card when using card mode.
Canon Speedlite 220EX, 420EX, and 550EX can be attached for shooting with automatic flash con-
trol.
Half-pressed lock indicator ( ) for PHOTO button in viewfinder. When AF is locked, this indicator
is displayed in green and the flash charged indicator is displayed ( ).
4.5.6 Exposure control
1. Photometric system Center-weighted metering: Easy Recording mode, Auto mode, Tv (shutter priority) mode, Av (aper-
ture priority) mode, Manual mode
Whole area average photometry + 70-segment evaluative photometry: Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode
2. AE function
a. Program AE Easy Recording mode, Auto mode, Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode
b. Tv mode (Shutter priority mode)
Shutter speed setting 1/8 second, 1/15 second, 1/30 second, 1/60 second, 1/100 second, 1/250 second, 1/500 second, 1/1000
second, 1/2000 second, 1/4000 second, 1/8000 second, 1/15000 second, CS
CS: Clear Scan
When recording on a card: up to 1/500 second
Clear scan frequency setting 50.3 Hz to 200.0 Hz, 170 levels
(when clear scan is selected)
c. Av mode (Aperture priority mode)
Fixed when using F1.6, F2.0, F2.4, F2.8, F3.4, F4.0, F4.8, F5.6, F6.7, F8.0 (when using card: F2.0 to F8.0)
aperture tape
value
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-17
3. Manual shooting
Manual mode The shutter speed and gain, aperture value can be adjusted to any setting. The standard exposure can be
checked using the exposure meter ( ) in the viewfinder.
Shutter speed setting 1/6 second, 1/12 second, 1/25 second, 1/50 second, 1/60 second, 1/75 second, 1/90 second, 1/120
second, 1/150 second, 1/180 second, 1/210 second, 1/250 second, 1/300 second, 1/350 second, 1/400
second, 1/500 second, 1/600 second, 1/700 second, 1/800 second, 1/1000 second, 1/1200 second, 1/
14000 second, 1/16000 second, 1/2000 second, 1/2400 second, 1/2800 second, 1/3200 second, 1/4000
second, 1/8000 second, 1/16000 second, CS
when recording on a card: 1/50 second to 1/700 second
Clear scan frequency setting (when clear scan is selected)
50.3 Hz to 200.0 Hz, 170 levels
Aperture value setting F1.6, F1.8, F2.0, F2.2, F2.4, F2.6, F2.8, F3.2, F3.4, F3.7, F4.0, F4.4, F4.8 F5.2, F5.6, F6.2, F6.7, F7.3,
F8.0, CLOSE (The telephoto end ranges from F2.8 to F8.0, CLOSE) (when using card: F2.0 to F8.0,
CLOSE)
Gain select The gain level can be set to 0 dB, 6 dB, 12 dB, and 18 dB (0 dB, 6 dB, and 12 dB when using a card).
The gain can be set in manual mode.
4. Exposure correction function AE shift or AE lock. The shutter speed and aperture value can be adjusted after setting AE lock.
AE shift One of the 15 settings shown below can be selected by turning the Exposure Shift dial (Auto, Tv, and
Av modes).
AE shift amount ±6 levels from the center (-2.0, -1.5, -1.25, -1.0, -0.75, -0.5, -0.25, ±0, +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, +1.0, +1.25,
+1.5, +2.0).
The numerical value (AE ±0) is displayed in the viewfinder.
AE lock AE lock is set by pressing the Exposure dial (Auto, Tv, Av, Sand and Snow, and Spotlight modes).
After AE lock is set, the aperture, shutter speed and clear scan frequency can be adjusted. (However,
this is a correction system that supercedes the program diagram. During AE lock, the CS frequency can
be changed, but actual operation is not performed.)
4.5.7 AF (Auto Focus)
1. System TTL-video signal sensing AF
2. AF range finding area Screen center
3. Range finding window display None
4. AF operating range Closeup to infinity
10 mm to infinity (at wide end); full zoom area: 1 m to infinite
5. AF operating illumination range 50 lx to 100,000 lx
6. AF mode switching Continuous AF/manual focus. AF can be turned ON/OFF except in Easy Recording mode.
Manual focus Manual focus is performed by turning the focus ring on the lens when the AF is off (“MF” is displayed
in the viewfinder).
7. Range finding window display None
8. AF when accessory filter is attached AF can be used when attaching the WD-58H Wide Converter Lens
4.5.8 Viewfinder The viewfinder cannot be detached from the camera body.
1. Type Electronic color viewfinder
2. Angle Adjustable from 68° with the vertical to a flat horizontal position Viewfinder clicks when both ends
are reached.
3. Video display unit 0.44-inch screen, color LCD, 180,000 pixels (800(H) × 225(V))
TFT active matrix drive RGB delta arrangement
4. Field of vision ratio Approx. 90%
5. Eyepiece Fixed-length viewfinder
Diopter movement range +1.5 to -5.5 diopter (when eye is at eyepiece)
Lens configuration One molded aspheric lens + one molded spheric lens Two-lens configuration
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-18
4.5.9 LCD monitor 2.5-inch screen, color LCD, approx. 200,000 pixels (881 (H) × 228 (V))
TFT active matrix drive RGB delta arrangement adjustable brightness
1. Angle adjustment Possible; monitoring is possible for high-angle, low-angle, and during mirror shooting
2. Information display Color display of operating mode, quick zoom position, exposure indicator, battery power, remaining
tape, data codes, various warnings, etc.
Operating mode indicator (displayed as , , ) is displayed when display in Mirror mode is
selected during mirror shooting.
Audio level indicator During automatic mode:
During manual mode:
Relationship between LCD monitor and viewfinder
LCD panel position
Camera mode VCR mode
LCD panel CVF LCD panel CVF
Panel closed (panel facing inwards) OFF ON OFF ON
Panel closed (panel facing outwards) ON OFF ON OFF
mirror mode is
automatically turned off
Panel open ON OFF ON OFF
Mirror shooting * ON ON ON OFF
* The panel display is limited during Mirror mode (EVF and onscreen are displayed normally). Only Record, Record
Pause, and Eject are displayed. (Mirror mode is temporarily canceled during REC search and when making the menu
settings.)
4.5.10 White balance adjustment TTL 80 segments, new white extraction system white balance; includes set (1 position)/preset
: 5600k; : 3200k)
(selected through camera menu)
Adjustment range 2800k to 8000k
4.5.11 Special digital effects Fader, Effects, Color Bar (digital effects menu selection, only available when the camera is in tape
mode).
1. Fader Auto Fade, Wipe, Overlap (Auto Fade : linked with the START/STOP button, video and audio syn-
chronous white fade. North American and PAL models use video and audio synchronous black fade).
For the Wipe and Overlap, Fade of only video signal is possible. (Fade from the last still picture of the
previous scene that was shot by the Wipe, Overlap operation.)
2. Effects Effects can be performed in Motion video mode. The effects continue to applied until they are turned
off.
Black and White, Sepia, Art, Mirror, Mosaic, Strobe (0.5-second intervals), Tracer
3. Color Bar The EBU color bar is displayed for recording (it records on the initial section of the tape so that it can
be used as a reference signal during playback.)
Monitor screen for SMPTE color bar signal Monitor screen for EBU color bar signal
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-19
4.5.12 Microphone Stereo microphone (using electret condenser microphone)
1. Stereo directional Approx. 90° EVF, LCD monitor indicators
2. Frequency characteristics Normal/Voice/Wind Screen
selector
3. Microphone amplifier Selectable Includes ATT (20 dB)selector switch Audio level meter
Sensitivity (can also be used by external microphone)
Recording level Adjustable Can be used when selecting the recording level
(manual). The L and R recording level adjusting dials are used while viewing the
level meter (LCD) or monitoring the volume through headphones.
4.5.13 Other additional functions
1. Time code Displays recording time (0:00:00 to 7:59:59) and records in sub-code area.
2. Data code The date and camera information during recording are automatically recorded and can be displayed
during playback.
Time and date Automatic calendar range: January 1, 2002 through December 31, 2030 (the initial setting is January 1, 2002)
World clock capability (select the name of your destination city and the date and time are automati-
cally adjusted to the local date and time); supports daylight savings time.
During playback, time can be displayed in three different modes (date only, time and date, or time
only). (Time and date can be displayed for January 1, 1990 through December 31, 2089.)
Camera data Shutter speed, F-number, and gain information are recorded (but not displayed during recording), and
can be displayed during playback.
3. Accessory shoe Included. This product has contacts for the advanced accessory shoe and Canon Speedlite.
Advanced shoe Supports the MA-300 Microphone Adapter, DM-50 Directional Stereo Microphone, and VL-3 Video Light
E-TTL strobe Canon Speedlite 220EX, (380EX), 420EX, and 550EX can be attached for shooting with automatic
flash control during photo shooting and card recording.
This product has interlinked zoom operation with the (380EX), 420EX, and 550EX. Bounce shooting
and added light function are not supported. (E-TTL is not supported when the MA-300 Microphone
Adapter is attached.)
The flash cannot be used during AE lock, manual mode, when the shutter speed is 1/2000
second or more, or during Slow Shutter.
In Tv mode, the shutter speed that can be set during flash shooting ranges from 1/60 (1/50)
second to 1/1000 second.
4. REC Search mechanism Included. Tape can be played (forward or reverse) by pressing the REC Search button while camera
recording is paused. (When REC Search ends, the camera recording is paused again.)
5. REC Review function Included. Accessed by operating the Recording Check button ( ) when camera recording is paused.
6. Zero Set Memory Included. This function allows you to rewind or fast-forward the tape to the position where the WL-
D77 Zero Set Memory key is pressed (the counter value is set to 0:00:00). (During recording,
only zero setting is allowed. This function can be used in Playback mode.)
7. Remote control reception ON/OFF Possible. This can be done in Camera mode and VCR mode (through menu selection). When operating
WL-D77, this takes approx. 2 seconds.
8. Headphone volume adjustment Possible.
9. Self timer 10 seconds. The timer is approx. 2 seconds when set by the WL-D77 Wireless Controller.
10. Interval timer Interval time: 30 seconds, 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes Recording time: 0.5 second, 1 second, 1.5
seconds, 2 seconds (The time can be set in the menu.)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-20
11. Zebra pattern Areas of 80% or more brightness are indicated by a black-and-white zebra pattern.
Zebra pattern level Adjustable Can be set to 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 100% (menu setting)
12. Custom keys One. A function can be assigned to the key from among the following options: Index Recording,
Zebra Pattern, VCR Stop, On Screen, MIC, MIC ATT, Grip Zoom Speed, Handle Zoom Speed, Level
Meter, AE Shift, Image Stabilization, and No Setting (when using in Camera mode).
In Card mode, a function can be assigned from among the following options: Zebra Pattern, On Screen,
Grip Zoom Speed, Handle Zoom Speed, AE Shift, Image Stabilization, and No Setting.
In VCR mode, the function can be assigned from among the following options: On Screen, MIC, MIC
ATT, AUDIO IN ATT, Level Meter, and No Setting. In card playback mode, a function can be
assigned from On Screen and No Setting.
13. Custom presets A single preset button is provided. The image quality adjustment settings (color gain, hue, sharpness,
and setup level) can be stored to a button beforehand so that the optimum adjustment conditions can be
obtained when shooting by simply pressing the button.
The adjustments should be made while checking the image on the monitor.
Color gain adjustment Moving the cursor in the positive direction makes the colors darker, and moving in the negative direc-
tion makes the colors lighter. The user can select any setting for the color gain.
Hue adjustment Moving the cursor in the R direction makes skin tones redder, and moving in the G direction makes
skin tones greener. Since the coloring in skin tones can have a green hue under fluorescent lighting,
adjusting the hue can be effective in these cases.
Sharpness adjustment Moving the cursor in the positive direction makes the image clearer, and moving in the negative direc-
tion makes the image blurrier. The user can adjust the sharpness of the image to any selected setting.
Setup level adjustment Moving the cursor in the positive direction reduces the depth of the dark areas, and moving in the
negitive direction reduces the lift of the dark areas.
14. Displayed text recording The text displayed in the viewfinder can be recorded together with the image.
Combining with the EVF DISPLAY function allows the following information to be recorded (EVF
DISPLAY key toggle operation).
1. Normal display
2. Recording mode, operation mode, time code counter, and emergency indicator only
3. No display
The following are displayed when date and time display is selected in the display settings menu or
guide display.
1. Normal display
2. Recording mode, operation mode, time code counter, emergency indicator, and clock indicator
3. Clock indicator
4. No display
15. 16:9 area marker By displaying the area marker in the viewfinder during shooting, you can see beforehand which sec-
tions will be cut when a video shot in a 4:3 screen is converted to a 16:9 wide video.
16. Headphone volume adjustment Adjusted using the volume adjustment dial (15 levels). The volume can also be turned off.
16 : 9 area marker
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-21
17. Title mix function This function allows title images recorded on a memory card to be mixed and recorded during camera
shooting.
Mix title image Shooting can be performed by using the Title button on the handle display to select the image using
Title Image Select (Select Title Mix from the Camera menu to open the Title Mix menu, and then
select the image from the multi-images on the Title Image Select screen (six images displayed on a
screen)) and then by mixing the title images.
Create title image The PHOTO button is used to load the image when the Create Title Image screen displays the message
“PUSH SET TO MAKE A TITLE.” Once the image is loaded, Color Select and Mix Level can be used
to select the colors and adjust (brightness level) the area of the title image that was loaded.
Select Color for title image Select Color can be used to change to full-color or specific colors (nine available colors: black, blue,
green, cyan, red, magenta, yellow, and white), switch the cut and uncut sections.
Mix Level adjustment Mix Level can be used to retouch the cut section as a title image. The cut section and uncut section can
be switched as the title image using Color Select.
Record title image The title image (the same color as Mix Level) is recorded in the SD Memory card or MultiMedia card
using the Record command. (Once the title image is recorded in the memory card, changes can no
longer be made to the mix level and color.) The loaded image will be lost if Title Mix mode is exited
without saving the image to a card. (The memory card needs to be inserted beforehand.)
* Title Mix cannot be used in Easy Recording mode and when the color bar is displayed.
The flash and video light are disabled when creating a title image.
4.6 Recorder
4.6.1 Recording functions Camera shooting and recording, DV input recording, analog input recording
1. Recording format Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)
2. Tape speed SD spec Approx. 18.83 mm/second (in SP mode)
Approx. 12.57 mm/second (in LP mode)
3. DV input recording Complies with IEEE1394.
Records video/audio signals from a digital video camera connected through a DV cable.
4. Analog input recording Records analog video/audio signals using an S Video terminal and AV mini terminal.
5. Priority of terminals during DV terminal > S Video terminal > AV mini terminal
recording
4.6.2 Insert Recording Possible
1. Insert-capable tapes Only tapes with SP recording can be used in Insert Recording.
4.6.3 Audio Dubbing Recording Possible (SD spec tapes only)
1. Audio Dubbing-capable tapes Only tapes with 12-bit/SP recording (other than 4-channel simultaneous recording) can be used in
Audio Dubbing Recording.
2. Audio Dubbing signal input Audio signal from LINE (AV mini terminal) or microphone (external > internal).
3. Switching To Audio Dubbing Switch by pressing the Audio Dubbing button on the player or the remote control during Playback
Pause
4.6.4 Playback functions Standard Playback and Superb Playback
1. Standard Playback
a. Video Video recorded in SP and LP modes
b. Audio 16-bit Supports the following sampling frequencies: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz.
12-bit Sampling frequency: 32 kHz
Stereo 1, Stereo 2, or mixed playback of Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 (variable mix ratio)
2. Special Playback Plays video only
a. Still image playback Simulated frame playback: During normal movies
Frame playback: During frame movies, photo shooting
b. Fast-forward playback Approx. 11.5x speed
c. Rewind playback Approx. 11.5x speed
d. Frame playback Forward/reverse frame feeding
e. Slow playback Forward/reverse 1/3-speed
f. 1x SP playback Forward/reverse 1x speed
g. 2x SP playback Forward/reverse 2x speed
h. Edit search Forward/reverse 1x speed
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-22
4.6.5 Tape fast-forward/rewind time Approx. 2 minutes and 20 seconds (using 60-minute tape)
4.6.6 Input signals
1. DV terminal DV terminal (4P)
Signals SD format signals complying with IEEE1394-AV/C protocol
2. S Video terminal
Signal configuration PAL Y/C separated video signal
Video signals 1 Vp-p (brightness + synchronization signal)
Color signals 0.3 Vp-p (color burst signal)
Impedance 75 Ω
3. AV mini terminal φ 3.5 mm (Video and audio share the same terminal)
a. Video signals
Signal configuration PAL standard color video signals
Input impedance 75 Ω
Signal level 1 Vp-p (composite)
b. Audio signals
Impedance 47 kΩ (AUDIO ATT)/47 kΩ (AUDIO IN)
Signal level 0 dBv (47 kΩ)/-10 dBv (47 kΩ)
4. Microphone terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Impedance 5.6 kΩ (MIC ATT)/5.6 kΩ (MIC IN)
Signal level -35 dBv (600 Ω)/-55 dBv (600 Ω)
4.6.7 Output signals
1. DV terminal
Output signal Complies with IEEE1394-AV/C protocol
2. S Video terminal
Signal configuration PAL Y/C separated video signal
Video signal 1 Vp-p (brightness + synchronization signal)
Color signal 0.3 Vp-p (color burst signal)
Brightness signal S/N 50 dB or higher
Horizontal resolution
Self re-recording Maximum 540 TV lines (screen center)
Camera EEout Maximum 540 TV lines (screen center)
Catalog value: 540 TV lines (screen center)
3. Video/audio terminal φ 3.5 mm jack
a. Video signals
Video signal configuration PAL standard color video signals
Output impedance 75 Ω
Output signal level 1 Vp-p (composite)
Horizontal resolution
Self re-recording Approx. 540 TV lines (screen center)
Camera EEout Approx. 540 TV lines (screen center)
Catalog value: 540 TV lines (screen center)
b. Audio signals
Audio signal type Stereo audio signals (supports monaural output function)
Output impedance 3 kΩ or less
Output signal level +4 dBm (Full Scale)
Frequency characteristic 20 Hz to 23 kHz 16 bit (1 kHz reference ± 3 dB range)
20 Hz to 25 kHz 12 bit (1 kHz reference ± 3 dB range)
Audio signal S/N (Full Scale) A-curve compensation
During microphone terminal input 55 dB or higher
During line input 70 dB or higher
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-23
4. S Video terminal
Signal configuration PAL Y/C separated video signal
Video signal 1 Vp-p (brightness + synchronization signal)
Color signal 0.3 Vp-p (color burst signal)
Brightness signal S/N 45 dB or higher
Horizontal resolution
Self re-recording Approx. 540 TV lines (screen center)
Camera EEout Approx.540 TV lines (screen center)
Catalog value: Approx. 540 TV lines (screen center)
5. Headphone terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Output impedance 120 Ω
Output signal level -25 dBv (with 16 Ω load)
6. USB port Complies with USB 1.1
USB device class Complies with mass storage class 1.0
Compatible computer systems Windows systems: IBM-compatible PC/ATs, NEC PC98-NX Series
Macintosh systems: Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBook
Computer operating system Windows systems: Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP
Macintosh systems: Mac OS 8.6 to X
4.6.8 Memory card system
1. Types of memory cards used MultiMedia card, SD memory card
2. Recordable image types and image
quality
Card Recording mode Camera images can be recorded by pressing the Photo button.
3. File system Complies with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system); complies with Exif 2.2, and supports DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format).
Image recording JPEG
Card volume label CANON_DV
DCF folder and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG xxx: Folder number yyyy: File number
Title image folder and file name //TITLE/USRyyyyy.JPG yyyyy: File number
File number Files are internally managed in the following format: Folder Number_File Number.
Photographed images are assigned file numbers from 0001 to 9999, and are stored in folders (9999
files to a folder). Individual folders are assigned numbers from 100 to 999.
4. Recorded image size 640(H) × 480(V), 1488(H) × 1128(V)
5. Number of recorded images
(SDM-8M)
Still image Fine mode Approx. 66 images (per image: approx. 120 KB)
Standard mode Approx. 120 images (per image: approx. 65 KB)
The specifications for the number of recorded images are simple reference numbers; actual capacity
varies significantly according to photographing conditions such as the subject and the focal length at
the time of shooting.
6. Card formatting Cards should be formatted using the format command in the camcorder’s menu. Cards formatted on a
PC cannot be guaranteed to function properly as they may malfunction depending on the operating
system.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-24
4.6.9 Other functions
1. Editing function Can be used starting in Recording Pause or Stop mode, or starting with the power off. This does not
apply to cases where the cassette has been removed.
2. Automatic stop function This function is activated in the following cases:
When forward or reverse still image playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes
When a condensation warning is displayed
When the tape end or beginning is reached
3. Power automatic stop function This function is activated in the following cases:
When recording pause is continued for approx. 5 minutes
When the battery voltage falls below a specified value
4. Time code Automatically written during recording. Time code values range from 0:00:00:00 to 7:59:59:29
(hours: minutes: seconds: frames).
5. Photo search This function searches for images shot in Photo mode.
Forward/reverse photo search (use the / keys on the remote control after selecting Photo
Search with the remote control Search Select key)
Values can be entered in a range of up to the ±10
th
photo from the current position.
6. Date search If there is more than one recording date, this function cue up to the position where the date changes.
Forward/reverse date search (use the / keys on the remote control after selecting Date Search
with the remote control Search Select key)
Values can be entered in a range of up to the ±10
th
date from the current position.
7. Index search This function detects the positions where index signals were inserted during camera recording.
Forward and reverse index search (use the / keys on the remote control after selecting Date
Search with the remote control Search Select key)
Values can be entered in a range of up to the ±10
th
date from the current position.
8. World clock display After setting a reference city (the city where the clock’s time is set), when you take a picture, select the
name of the city where you are shooting and the date and time will be automatically changed to the
local date and time, and recorded in the data code.
9. Insert recording This function allows insertion recording of video and audio from the DV terminal, S-video terminal,
and AV mini terminal to tape that has been recorded in SP mode. This function cannot be performed
for input signals with copy protection.
10. Audio Dubbing Audio from the AV mini-terminal or microphones (built-in microphone or external microphones) can only
be recorded to tape as a 12-bit/SP mode recording when not using 4-channel simultaneous recording.
11. Speaker Built-in speaker, with volume adjustment
12. File transfer When the USB port on the PC and the USB port on the camcorder are connected using the interface
cable (IFC-300PCU) of the AK620 accessory kit, still images (JPEG files) recorded on the memory
card can be transferred to the PC.
If the “ZoomBrowser” program (for Windows) or “ImageBrowser” program (for Macintosh) on the
Digital Video Solutions Disk of the AK620 accessory kit is installed on the PC in advance, you can
transfer the desired images to the PC while viewing thumbnails of the still images recorded on the
memory card.
4.7 Terminals and ports
1. DV terminal Special 4-pin connector (IEEE1394 compatible); input and output
2. S Video terminal 4-pin mini-DIN; input and output
3. Video/audio terminal φ 3.5 mm, AV mini-terminals (yellow); input and output
4. External microphone input terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
5. Headphone terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
6. Editing terminal φ 2.5 mm mini mini jack (supports LANC)
7. USB port mini-B
8. Accessory shoe Compatible with advanced shoe contacts and flash contacts (E-TTL)
9. Memory card connection terminal Multi-pin
10. Battery terminal 2-pin
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-25
4.8 Power supply
1. Input power 7.2 V DC (battery)
2. Power consumption During shooting: Approx. 4.8 W (EVF); approx. 5.7 W (LCD)
During playback: Approx. 5.3 W (LCD)
4.9 Dimensions (W_H_D) Approx. 118 × 136 × 306 mm (approx. 4 5/8 × 5 3/8 × 12 inches)
4.10 Weight
1. Camcorder alone: Approx. 1.12 kg (approx. 2 lb, 7 1/2 oz)
2. Total equipped weight: Approx. 1.27 kg (approx. 2 lb, 12 3/4 oz)
(Includes hood, BP-915, DVM-E30, lens cap and lithium button battery)
4.11 Temperature and humidity requirements
1. Temperature and humidity 0 to 40°C, maximum 85% relative humidity
requirements for performance
2. Temperature and humidity -5 to 45°C, maximum 65% relative humidity
requirements for operation
4.12 Related products (list main accessories, including those not currently for sale)
Canon Digital Videocassette DVM-E60/DVM-E30
Canon Battery Pack BP-914/BP-915/BP-924/ BP-927/BP-930/BP-930R/BP-941/BP-945
* Canon Compact Power Adapter CA-920
Power Cable DOM/A/E/B/AS
* Canon Car Battery Adapter CB-920
* Canon Power Supply Coupler DC-920
Canon Dual Battery Charger/Holder CH-910 A/E/B/AS
Power Supply Coupler DC-915 (supplied with CH-910)
Canon Directional Stereo Microphone DM-50
Canon Battery Video Light VL-10Li
Canon Video Light VL-3
* Canon Canon Wireless Remote Controller WL-D77
Canon Zoom Remote Controller ZR-1000
* Canon Microphone Adapter MA-300
* Canon Wide-Converter WD-58H (with hood)
* Canon System Case HC-4100
Canon DV Cable CV-150F (4-4 pin)
Canon DV Cable CV-250F (4-6 pin)
Canon Interface Cable IFC-300PCU
Canon Stereo Video Cable STV-150N
Canon S-Video Cable S-150
Canon Skirt Adapter PC-A10 (PAL models only)
Canon Shoulder Strap SS-650
* Canon Digital Video Solution Disk Ver. 3.0
Canon Speedlite 220EX, (380EX), 420EX, 550EX
* New product
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-26
5. External View
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-27
6. System diagram
SD Memory Card
or
MultiMediaCard
IFC-300PCU USB Cable
PC Card Adapter
FD Adapter
Stereo Microphone
(commercially available)
WL-D77
Wireless
Controller
MiniDV
Video
Cassette
TV
VCR
ZR-1000 Zoom
Remote Controller
WD-58H
MA-300 Microphone
Adapter
DM-50 Directional
Stereo Microphone
VL-3 Video Light
CB-920 Car Battery
Adapter
(Available soon)
DC-920
DC Coupler
SS-650 Shoulder Strap
CA-920 Compact
Power Adapter
CH-910 Dual Battery
Charger/Folder
220EX/420EX/550EX
Speedlight
HC-4100
Sysytem Case
S-150 S-video Cable
Digital Device
Personal Computer
CV-150F DV Cable
BP-900 Series
Battery Pack
STV-250N Stereo
Video Cable
BP-900 Series
Battery Pack
VL-10Li
Battery
Video Light
BP-900 Series
Battery Pack
CV-150F/CV-250F DV Cable
PC-A10
SCART
Adapter
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-28
7. Overview of viewfinder/LCD Panel displays
7-1 Camera mode
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Camera mode
Zoom, exposure, and exposure correction
indicator display
(displayed for approx. four seconds after
zooming)
Digital zoom is OFF
Zooming is stopped
Zooming to telephoto end
Zooming to wide end
Digital zoom is ON
Using 40x
Using 100x
Exposure
Exposure is set to minimum Cursor flashes
Exposure is set to ± 0
Exposure is set to maximum Cursor flashes
Exposure correction
During AE No display
Exposure maximum -11 levels During mirror
Shooting mirror
Exposure initial value mode (LCD)

Exposure maximum +11 levels
Camera information display
(program AE, shutter speed, aperture value)
Program AE display
Green mode is selected Green display
Auto mode is selected The AUTO display is shown for
Shutter priority mode selected approx. four Seconds after the
1/8 second is set selection is mode
1/15,000 second is set
Clear scan is selected
6
6
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-29
Aperture priority mode is selected
F1.6 is set
F8.0 is set
Manual mode is selected
Shutter speed is set
1/8 (1/6) second is set
1/15,000 (1/16,000) second is set
Aperture value is set
F1.6 is set
F8 is set
Gain setting 0 dB, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB
Sand & Snow mode is selected
Spotlight mode is selected
AE lock display
AE lock display
AE lock is set to minimum exposure Number flashes during minimum
exposure
During AE lock
AE lock is set to maximum exposure Number flashes during maximum
exposure
AE shift display
AE shift is set to minimum
AE shift is 0
AE shift is set to maximum
When Full Auto is selected
Program AE mode menu
User custom preset settings display
ND filter display
Turn off ND filter instruction is displayed mark flashes
Attach external ND filter instruction is mark flashes
displayed
Turn on ND filter instruction is displayed ND, mark flashes
ND filter is on ND is displayed
Other conditions No display
Manual focus display Displayed only during manual focus
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
6
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-30
Digital Feature display
Fade Trigger FADE-T
Wipe WIPE
Overlap OVERLAP
Black and White BLK & WHT
Sepia SEPIA
Art ART
Mirror MIRROR
Mosaic MOSAIC
Strobe STROBE
Tracer TRACER
Color bar CLR BARS
Digital effects are turned off D. EFFECT
Digital Feature menu
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
When Fader is selected
When Effects is selected
Digital Feature selection
Press the “D.E. SEL” button in Camera mode, VCR mode, or Card Recording mode.
The line where the cursor is located in the menu is displayed with a turquoise background.
The previously selected items and the corresponding settings are shown in yellow.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-31
Date and time display and custom key display
Date and time display
Area and daylight saving time display
London LONDON
London daylight saving time LONDON
Paris PARIS
Cairo CAIRO
Moscow MOSCOW
Dubai DUBAI
Karachi KARACHI
Dacca DACCA
Bangkok BANGKOK
Hong Kong H. KONG
Tokyo TOKYO
Sydney SYDNEY
Solomon Islands SOLOMON
Wellington WELLGTN
Samoa SAMOA
Honolulu HONOLU.
Anchorage ANCHOR.
Los Angeles L.A.
Denver DENVER
Chicago CHICAGO
New York N.Y.
Caracas CARACAS
Rio RIO
Fernando FERNAN.
Azores AZORES
Azores AZORES
Time and date display 01-01-2002 AM 12:00 to 12-31-2020 PM 12:59
Custom key display
Index Write function is set INDEX WRITE
Zebra Pattern function is set ZWBRA
VCR Stop function is set VCR STOP
On Screen function is set TV SCREEN
Microphone Characteristics (MIC) is set MIC F SEL
Microphone Attenuation (MIC ATT) function is set MIC ATT
Grip Zoom Speed function is set ZOOM GRIP
Handle Zoom Speed function is set ZOOM HANDLE
Audio Level Meter function is set AUDIO LEVEL
AE Shift function is set AE SHIFT
Image Stabilization function is set IMAGE S.
Image stabilizer display
The image stabilizer is ON
The image stabilizer is OFF No display
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
S P A R I
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-32
Approx. 100% remaining
Approx. 75% remaining
Approx. 50% remaining
Approx. 25% remaining
Approx. 0% remaining
Battery pack low power warning
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Tape mode display
SP mode is selected SP
LP mode is selected LP
Operation mode display
During Record (green display) REC
During Record Pause (green display) PAUSE
Playback is stopped (green display) STOP
During Cassette Eject (green display) or Error (flashes red) EJECT
During Forward Record Search/Record Review (green display)
During Reverse Record Search/Record Review (green display)
White balance display
When Set is selected
When Indoor is selected
When Outdoor is selected
Tape counter display
Time code display
Not entered
Zero Set Memory
Not entered
Timer display
During recording Count up from recording
start (0 seconds) to 10
During self timer countdown seconds
All other conditions No display
Tape information display
Remaining tape amount is unknown
Remaining tape amount is unknown (during interval recording)
255 minutes of tape remaining green
99 minutes of tape remaining green
5 minutes of tape remaining yellow
0 minutes of tape remaining red
Tape end flashes red
When the erasure prevention is set to ON, the display flashes in red.
Self timer and interval timer display
Self timer is set
Interval timer is set Lights up
Interval timer is in standby Flashes
Battery pack remaining power display
sec sec
sec sec
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-33
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Power warning display for lithium button battery Flashes red
Condensation warning display Flashes red
Remote control sensor display
Remote control code 1 is selected
Remote control code 2 is selected
Remote control OFF is selected The display flashes violet
for approx. four seconds
when the remote control
signal is received
Microphone characteristics display
Normal is selected NORMAL
Voice is selected VOICE
Wind Screen Cut is selected W. SCREEN
Displayed text recording warning CHAR. REC Red text display flashes
Audio mode display
16-bit is selected 16 bit
12-bit is selected 12 bit
* Displayed for approx. four seconds after the menu setting is made
DV control display
IEEE1394 connected device side is in Record status
IEEE1394 connected device side is in Stop/Pause status
IEEE1394 connected device side is in Unable to Receive
DV Control status
IEEE1394 is not connected The “DV IF” indicator flashes
DV control is off
16:9 mode display
16:9 mode is selected 16:9
Movie mode, Photo mode, and Index Recording
Still image recording (Photo recording) is set
Frame Movie mode is selected
Normal Recording (Field Movie) mode is selected
Index Recording is selected
Half-press lock display
The display flashes in white during AF operation and then turns green
after AF lock
Advanced shoe information
DM-50/VL-3 valid connection
Flash display
Flash charging Flashes white
Flash charged Green display
Level meter and headphone volume adjustment display
Level meter is set to Auto
Level meter is set to Manual
Mirror shooting is set to Auto
Mirror shooting is set to Manual
No display
No display
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-34
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Headphone volume is adjusted
Headphones are off
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-35
7-2 VCR mode
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
VCR mode
Audio output display
12-bit Stereo 1 is selected
12-bit Stereo 2 is selected
12-bit Mix 1:1 is selected
12-bit Mix Variable is selected
16-bit No display
Audio Mix Balance display
ST-1:ST-2 = 1:0
ST-1:ST-2 = 1:1
ST-1:ST-2 = 0:1
Custom key setting display
On Screen is set TV SCREEN
Microphone is set MIC
Microphone Attenuation (MIC ATT) is set MIC ATT
Audio Input Attenuation is set AUDIO ATT
Level meter is set AUDIO LEVEL
Custom key setting is turned off No display
Data code display
T
i
m
e

a
n
d

d
a
t
e

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
Date setting
Time and date Time and date and camera data Camera data
Data code setting
Time setting
Date and time
setting
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-36
Camera data
F-number display The F-number for this product is
F 1.6 to F 8.
F-number closed
When not entered
Shutter speed display The shutter speed of this product
ranges from 1/8 (1/6) to 1/15000
(1/16000) sec.
Not entered
Time display
Time setting is selected
Not entered
Time and time setting are selected
Not entered
Date display
Not entered
Recording mode display Based on the recording mode in the camera mode display
Operating mode display
During Recording Red display
During Recording pause Green display
Cassette is ejected
Playback is stopped
Playback
Fast-forward
Rewind
No tape
Fast-forward playback
2× SP playback
1× SP playback
Slow playback
Frame advance playback
Still image playback
Reverse still image playback
Frame reverse playback
Slow reverse playback
1× SP reverse playback
2× SP reverse playback
Rewind playback Green display
Forward date/photo search
Reverse date/photo search
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
JAN.
DEC.
.
.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-37
FF return
REW return
AV Insert pause
AV Insert recording
Audio dubbing pause
Audio dubbing recording
Tape counter
Time code display
Not entered
Zero Set Memory Same as during Camera mode
Remaining tape display Same as during Camera mode
Remaining battery power warning display Same as during Camera mode
Condensation warning display Same as during Camera mode
Remote sensor code display Same as during Camera mode
Microphone characteristics display Same as during Camera mode
Audio mode display Same as during Camera mode
16:9 mode display Same as during Camera mode
DV input display
During DV input
AV to DV signal conversion is selected
Other conditions No display
Speaker volume adjustment/headphone/level
meter display
Speaker volume adjustment
Volume is OFF
Headphone volume adjustment display Same as during Camera mode
Level meter display Same as during Camera mode
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
RTN
RTN
4
IN
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-38
7-3 Camera/card mode
Camera/card mode
Zoom, exposure, and exposure correction display
Zoom display Same as during Camera mode (This is only displayed for optical zoom.)
Exposure display Same as during Camera mode
Exposure correction display Same as during Camera mode
Camera information display
Program AE mode display Same as during Camera mode
AE lock display Same as during Camera mode
AE shift display Same as during Camera mode
Custom preset display Same as during Camera mode
ND filter display Same as during Camera mode
Manual focus display Same as during Camera mode
Date and time display/custom key display
Time and date display Same as during Camera mode
(date and time only)
Custom key display
Zebra Pattern is selected ZEBRA
On Screen is selected TV SCREEN
Grip Zoom Speed is selected ZOOM GRIP
Handle Zoom Speed is selected ZOOM HANDLE
AE Shift is selected AE SHIFT
Image Stabilization is selected IMAGE S.
No function is selected No display
Card recording image quality display
White balance display Same as during Camera mode
Card access display
During saving of image Shown in red, displayed in sequence
When card access is set to ON (motion video display provided by bitmap (red
box moves to right))
During loading of image Shown in green, displayed in sequence
When card access is set to ON (motion video display provided by bitmap
(green box moves to left))
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
FINE
STD
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-39
Card free space display
No card (flashes red)
9999 or more images can be recorded (The card display is green from
9999 images down to 6 images)
99 images can be recorded
5 images can be recorded (Card display is yellow from 5
images down to 1 image)
0 images can be recorded (Card display is red)
Self timer display Same as during Camera mode
Battery remaining power/low power warning display Same as during Camera mode
Lithium battery low-power warning display Same as during Camera mode
Condensation warning display Same as during Camera mode
Remote sensor code display Same as during Camera mode
Half-press lock display Same as during Camera mode
Flash display Same as during Camera mode
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-40
7-4 Card playback mode
Print mark display
Protect mark display
DCF file name display
Directory Number_File Number
Card access display
Writing to card Shown in red, displayed in sequence
When card access is set to ON (motion video display provided by bitmap (red
box moves to right))
Reading from card Shown in green, displayed in sequence
When card access is set to ON (motion video display provided by bitmap (green
box moves to left))
Image number display
No card (Display flashes red)
Checking number of images recorded on card
0 recorded images
9
th
of 99 recorded images
99
th
of 99 recorded images
9999
th
of 9999 recorded images
Image size display (Horizontal pixels) Changes according to image size
Custom key display
On Screen is set TV SCREEN
No setting is made No display
Data code display Same as during VCR mode (date and time only)
Slideshow operation guide display
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-41
7-5 Menu display
The available menu items are Camera Mode, VCR Mode, Card/Camera Mode, and Card Playback Mode.
7-5-1 Camera mode
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
CAM. SET UP D. ZOOM OFF 40X Lithium
40X battery
200X
MOVIE MODE NORMAL NORMAL Lithium
FRAME battery
IMAGE S. ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
AE SHIFT Lithium
batter
16 : 9 ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
ZEBRA ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
ZEBRA LEVEL 80 90 Lithium
85 battery
90
95
100
ZOOM GRIP VARIABLE VARIABLE Lithium
LOW battery
MEDIUM
FAST
ZOOM HANDLE LOW MEDIUM Lithium
MEDIUM battery
FAST
CLEAR SCAN 50.3 Hz 50.3 Hz Lithium
200 Hz battery
– – –
SELF-TIMER ON OFF Reset by turning
OFF power on
INTERVAL Go to Interval Setting screen
RETURN
CSTM PRESET COLOR GAIN Lithium
battery
COLOR PHASE Lithium
battery
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-42
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
CSTM PRESET SHARPNESS Lithium
battery
SETUP LEVEL Lithium
batter
RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium
LP battery
AUDIO MODE 16 bit 16 bit Lithium
12 bit battery
MIC ATT ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
MIC NORMAL NORMAL Lithium
VOICE battery
W. SCREEN
PWR SAVE SHUT OFF SHUT OFF Lithium
VCR STOP
RETURN
DISP. SET UP LCD BRIGHT *1 Lithium
battery
EVF BRIGHT *1 Lithium
battery
LCD MIRROR *1 ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
16 : 9 GUIDES ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
TV SCREEN ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
AUDIO LEVEL ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
GUIDE INFO *1 OFF OFF Lithium
CUSTOM KEY battery
D/T DISPLAY
CARD ACCESS ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
DEMO MODE ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
RETURN
SYSTEM WL. REMOTE *2 Lithium
battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-43
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
SYSTEM BEEP *1 ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
CHAR. REC ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
DV CONTROL ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
T. ZONE/DST LONDON PARIS Lithium
LONDON battery
PARIS
PARIS
• • • •
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR.
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNAN.
• • • •
AZORES
AZORES
RETURN
CUSTOM KEY CUSTOM KEY INDEX WRITE INDEX WRITE Lithium
ZEBRA battery
VCR STOP
TV SCREEN
MIC
MIC ATT
ZOOM GRIP
ZOOM HANDLE
AUDIO LEVEL
AE SHIFT
IMAGE S.
(No display)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-44
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
CAM. SET UP INTERVAL T. ON OFF
OFF
INTERVAL 30 sec 30 sec
1 min
5 min
10 min
REC TIME 0.5 sec 0.5 sec
1.0 sec
1.5 sec
2.0 sec
RETURN
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
Interval Setting
TITLE MIX TITLE SELECT Go to Title Image Selection screen
TITLE MAKE Go to Title Image Selection screen
RETURN
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
Select Title Mix Selection Screen
TITLE MIX TITLE MAKE COLOR SELECT
MIX LEVEL
SEAVE
RETURN
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
Title Image Creation Screen
*1: Except for the menu screens, the regular screens do not show indicators for Tally lamp, Beep, LCD bright, Mirror, or Date and
Time.
*2: Except for the menu screens, this is shown on the regular screen for only four seconds after the power is
turned on and after exiting the menu. However, this is displayed only when the date and time setting is turned off.
Also, OFF ( ) in the remote control code is constantly displayed.
RETURN
TITLE MIX Go to Title Mix Selection screen
RETURN
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-45
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
VCR SET UP OUTPUT CH *1 L/R L/R Reset by tuming power
L/L off
R/R
AUDIO DUB. AUDIO IN AUDIO IN Lithium
MIC. IN battery
MIC NORMAL NORMAL Lithium
VOICE battery
W. SCREEN
MIC ATT ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
AUDIO ATT ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
AV DV OUT ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
RETURN
DISP. SET UP LCD BRIGHT *1 Lithium
battery
EVF BRIGHT *1 Lithium
battery
DISPLAYS ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
6 SEC. DATE *1 ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
DATA CODE *2 DATE/TIME DATE/TIME Lithium
CAMERA DATA battery
CAM. & D/T
D/TIME SEL *2 DATE DATE & TIME Lithium
TIME battery
DATE & TIME
CUSTOM KEY ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
AUDIO LEVEL ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
RETURN
SYSTEM WL. REMOTE *2 Lithium
battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
7-5-2 VCR mode
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-46
SYSTEM BEEP ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
T. ZONE/DST LONDON PARIS Lithium
LONDON battery
PARIS
PARIS
• • • •
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNAN.
• • • •
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL *2 Lithium
battery
RETURN
CUSTOM KEY CUSTOM KEY TV SCREEN TV SCREEN Lithium
MIC battery
MIC ATT
AUDIO ATT
AUDIO LEVEL
(No display)
RETURN
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
*1: Except for the menu screens, the regular screens do not show indicators for the LCD bright, 6 sec. Date,
Output CH, or Beep.
*2: Except for the menu screens, this is shown on the regular screen only when the Data Code is set to ON.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-47
7-5-3 Card/Camera mode
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
CAM. SET UP IMAGE S. ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
AE SHIFT + 2. 0 ± 0. 0 Lithium
batter
± 0. 0

- 2. 0
ZEBRA ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
ZEBRA LEVEL 80 90 Lithium
85 battery
90
95
100
ZOOM GRIP VARIABLE VARIABLE Lithium
LOW battery
MEDIUM
FAST
ZOOM HANDLE LOW MEDIUM Lithium
MEDIUM battery
FAST
SELF-TIMER ON OFF Reset by tuming power
OFF on
RETURN
CSSTM PRESET COLOR GAIN Lithium
battery
COLOR PHASE Lithium
battery
SHARPNESS Lithium
battery
SETUP LEVEL Lithium
battery
RETURN
CARD SET UP QUALITY FINE FINE Lithium
STANDARD battery
IMAGES RES. *1 1488 × 1128 1488 × 1128 Lithium
640 × 480 battery
FILE NOS. *1 PRSET CONTINUOS Lithium
CONTINUOS battery
SHTR SOUND ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
RETURN
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-48
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
DISP. SET UP LCD BRIGHT *1 Lithium
battery
EVF BRIGHT *1 Lithium
battery
LCD MIRROR *1 ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
TV SCREEN ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
GUIDE INFO *1 OFF OFF Lithium
CUSTOM KEY battery
D/T DISPLAY
CARD ACCESS ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
DEMO MODE ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
RETURN
SYSTEM WL. REMOTE *2 Lithium
battery
OFF
BEEP *1 ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-49
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
SISTEM T. ZONE/DST *2 LONDON PARIS Lithium
LONDON battery
PARIS
PARIS
• • • •
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR.
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNAN.
• • • •
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL *2 Lithium
battery
RETURN
CUSTOM KEY CUSTOM KEY ZEBRA ZEBRA Lithium
TV SCREEN battery
ZOOM GRIP
ZOOM HANDLE
AF SHIFT
IMAGE S.
(No display)
RETURN
*1: Except for the menu screens, the regular screens do not show indicators for the Beep, LCD bright, Mirror,
Date and Time display, File No., and Shutter Sound.
*2: Except for the menu screens, this is shown on the regular screen for only four seconds after the power is
turned on and after exiting the menu. However, this is displayed only when the date and time setting is turned
off. Also, OFF ( ) in the remote control code is constantly displayed.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-50
7-5-4 Card Playback mode
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
CARD SET UP COPY CANCEL CANCEL Lithium
(Single screen) [ ] EXECUTE battery
PRINT MARK PRINT MARK Go to Erase All screen
IMAGE ERASE CANCEL CANCEL Lithium
SINGLE battery
ALL
PROTECT Go to Title Protect screen
TITLE ERASE Go to Title Erase screen
FORMAT CANCEL CANCEL Lithium
EXECUTE battery
RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium
LP battery
RETURN
DISP. SET UP LCD BRIGHT *1 Lithium
battery
EVF BRIGHT *1 Lithium
battery
DISPLAY ON ON Lithium
OFF <PLAYBK> battery
D/TIME SEL *2 DATE DATE & TIME Lithium
TIME battery
DATE & TIME
CUSTOM KEY ON ON Lithium
OFF <PLAYBK> battery
CARD ACCESS ON OFF Lithium
OFF battery
RETURN
SYSTEM WL. REMOTE *2 Lithium
battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
BEEP *1 ON ON Lithium
OFF battery
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-51
Main menu item Submenu item
PAL model
Backup
Settings Default
*1: Except for the menu screens, the regular screens do not show indicators for the LCD bright, Output CH, or
Beep.
*2: Except for the menu screens, this is shown on the regular screen only when the Data Code is set to ON.
However, this is displayed only when the date and time setting is turned off. Also, OFF ( ) in the remote
control code is constantly displayed.
SYSTEM T. ZONE/DST *2 LONDON PARIS Lithium
LONDON battery
PARIS
PARIS
• • • •
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR.
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNAN.
• • • •
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL *2 Lithium
battery
RETURN
CUSTOM KEY CUSTOM KEY TV SCREEN TV SCREEN Lithium
(No display) battery
RETURN
RETURN
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-52
7-6 Card-related screen displays
7-6-1 Card image check screen
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Card image check screen
Image protect set/clear screen
Image erase screens
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Slide show screen
7-6-2 Side show screen
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-53
7-6-4 Image Protect screen
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Image protect screen
7-6-5 Print mark screen
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Print mark screen
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Index screen
7-6-3 Index screen
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-54
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Copy ( ) selection screen
Copy ( ) execute screen
All print marks are eraesd
7-6-6 Card execution/Copy screen
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Image erase selection screen
Erasing one image
7-6-7 Card execution/Image erase screen
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-55
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Warning: Erasing in progress
Erasing all images
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Format screen
Format execution confirmation screen
Format execution screen
7-6-8 Format screen
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-56
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Title mix selection screen
Title image selection screen
Title image creation standby screen
Title image creation screen
Create Title image:
Color selection screen
Create Title image:
Mix level selection screen
7-6-9 Title mix selection screen
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-57
7-6-10 Title mix screen
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Title mix screen
7-6-11 Title erase screen
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Title erase screen
7-6-12 Title erase screen
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Title erase screen
7-6-13 Title protect screen
Menu indication PAL Model Remarks
Title protect screen
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-58
7-7 Bitmap display
1. Animation at power ON Displayed only at power ON
K K K K × K
from power OFF state (not
displayed when modes are
changed).
2. When cassette is inserted
— — K — K × Tape stopped
3. When tape is driven Forward driving: The reel is
(fast-forward/rewind) wound clockwise, and light
— — K — K ×
moves from left to right.
Reverse driving: The reel is
wound counterclockwise, and
light moves from right to left.
4. During card reading Linked with card reading
display by character generator.
K K × K K K Not displayed during slides, or
during frame movement on in
dex screen.
5. During card writing
Always displayed during card
K K — K K K
writing.
5a.EVF and EE OUT in mirror
shooting mode for card recording The word “[CARD]”
× K × × K K disappears in mirror shooting
mirror mode.
5b.LCD monitor in mirror shooting The word “[CARD]”
mirror mode for card recording disappears from the LCD
× K × × — K
monitor in mirror shooting
mirror mode, and a card
cutout area appears in the
upper left.
6. During card formatting
— — — K K ×
Always displayed during card
formatting.
7. When an image is erased
— K — K K ×
Always displayed when an
image is erased.
8. Power OFF warning Displayed starting 20 seconds
K — — — × × before the 5-minute timer
expires.
Modes which appear
Link to Menu
Bitmap Tape Card Tape Card
on-screen ON/OFF
Remarks
shooting recording playback Playback
setting
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-59
Modes which appear
Link to Menu
Bitmap Tape Card Tape Card
on-screen ON/OFF
Remarks
shooting recording playback Playback
setting
9. USB connection with PC
— — — — — × Always displayed in PC mode.
10a. Recording level is set to AUTO
K — K — × K
Not displayed during blue
background
10b. Recording level at EVF during
LR indicator is turned off. In
mirror shooting mode recording
the LCD monitor, the left and
is set to AUTO K — K — K K
right sides are displayed in
reverse.
10c. Recording level is set to
MANUAL
Not displayed during blue
K — K — K K
background
10d. Recording level at EVF during
LR indicator is turned off. In
mirror shootingmode recording
the LCD monitor, the left and
is set to MANUAL K — K —
right sides are displayed in
reverse.
11. 16:9 marker
K — — — K K
Displayed under the level
meter
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-60
7-8 Warning displays
• When copy-protected tape is played.
• When the power is turned on without setting the area and/or time and date.
• When copy protection information is detected during DV input or LINE input, or when the signal output
from the television or VCR is garbled during analog input.
• When a cassette is inserted while there is a mechanical error or condensation in the unit.
• When "REC" is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC, without a connection to DV input, or in
a condition where the connected DV input cannot be recognized.
• When the battery power is low.
• When condensation is detected (if a cassette is inserted, a "REMOVE THE CASSETTE" message appears).
• When "REC" is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC in VCR mode, if the cassette is set for
erasure prevention. In Camera mode, when the power is turned ON, when the "Start/Stop" button is
pressed, and when a cassette is inserted, if the cassette is set for erasure prevention.
• When the tape end is detected, or when a key (FF, PLAY, etc.) which drives the tape forward is pressed
in a mode that allows transition to forward driving during the detection process.
• When the Audio Dubbing or AV Insert button is pressed at a tape position recorded in LP; or when LP
mode is detected during audio dubbing or AV Insert.
• When the Audio Dubbing button is pressed at a tape position with 16-bit or 4-channel simultaneous recording;
or when 16-bit mode or 4-channel simultaneous recording mode is detected during audio dubbing.

• When a blank tape area is detected during audio dubbing or AV Insert.
• When clogging is detected in the heads during continuous shooting switch mode.
• When a card error occurs and data cannot be recorded on the card.
• When the card is full.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-61
• When an attempt is made to play an image in an unplayable format, an incompatible JPEG image, or
an image with corrupt data.
• When an attempt is made to create a directory with the same name as an existing directory; or when
the maximum number of file numbers and directory numbers are created.
• When there are too many print marks (51 or more), or when a mark file cannot be edited.
• When there are no images to be played in the card.
• When there is no card in the camcorder socket.
• When an attempt is made to record on an SD card set for erasure prevention, in a mode that allows
card recording (VCR mode, Card Recording mode).
A warning (warning text) is displayed for approx. four seconds in the center of the screen when an
abnormality, etc. occurs.
**
**
While the warning (warning text) is displayed, only actions enabling a mode transition are accepted.
The warning display disappears simultaneous with the acceptance of such an action.
• When the card cover is opend.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-62
7-9 LCD indicators
Level meter
During Camera mode and Line Input mode: Displayed when the REC LEVEL switch is set to MANU.
ST-1 During Camera mode: Displayed when set to 12-bit mode.
During VCR mode: Displayed during actual playback when Audio Monitor Select is not set to ST-2, except
when nothing is recorded on the tape or a 16-bit recording is being used.
DV IN mode: Displayed if ST-1 is selected in the display indicator when a 12-bit output signal is used at the
master side.
(Left side) Displayed when the camera is in playback status in VCR mode and ST-1 is displayed. It is also displayed
during 16-bit playback.
ST-2 During VCR mode: Displayed during actual playback when Audio Monitor Select is not set to ST-1, except
when nothing is recorded on the tape or a 16-bit recording is being used.
DV IN mode: Displayed if ST-2 is selected in Audio Monitor Select when a 12-bit output signal is used at the
master side.
(Right side) Displayed when the camera is in playback status in VCR mode and ST-2 is displayed.
During VCR mode: Displayed during actual playback when Audio Monitor Select is set to MIX, except when
nothing is recorded on the tape or a 16-bit recording is being used.
DV IN mode: Displayed if MIX is selected in Audio Monitor Select when a 12-bit output signal is used at the
master side.
Both the right and left sides are 24-segment level indicators with peak hold. The peak hold function displays
the peak segment for one second after the peak is updated.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-63
8. Backing up various data
8-1 Active memory (EEPROM, mechanical)
• Focus position (when AF is off)
• Zoom position
• Custom button settings
• User preset data
8-2 Backup by main power supply
The condensation timer is backed up by the main power supply alone.
8-3 Backup by main power supply or backup power supply (lithium button primary battery)
The table below lists the item (excluding menu items) backed up by the main power supply or backup power
supply (lithium button primary battery).
8-4 Backup conditions related to switching actions
8-4-1 Turning off the power (Camera mode)
When Camera mode is in “Program AE” mode.
In Easy Recording mode, after the power is turned on, the specifications are the same as in 9-4-2
(Switching to “Easy Recording”).
Item Default Remarks
Digital zoom position Optical tele end
WB data (SET)
Time and date settings (auto date) 2002. 1.1 12:00 AM
Menu cursor position Very top
Time code - - - -
Mix balance Center
Headphone volume Center
Speaker volume Center
Mechanical errors - - - - Reset when main power supply is disconnected.
Item Power switch OFF, VCR
G Camera (tape/card) mode
Program AE menu Backup
Autofocus ON/OFF Reset (set to AF)
AE lock ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
Digital effects ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
Headphone volume * CAM K
On-screen ON/OFF K
Zero Set Memory counter value * CAM K
G Camera (tape/card) menu item setting
Digital effects selection Backup *Independent
Fader * CAM Backup *Independent
Effects Backup *Independent
Shutter speed
Digital zoom Backup
Image stabilizer Backup
16:9 Backup
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-64
Item Power switch OFF, VCR
White balance Backup
Remote control code Backup
Record mode * CAM Backup
Confirmation beep Backup
Microphone characteristics Backup
Audio mode * CAM * SD Backup
LCD brightness adjustment Backup
Mirror shooting Backup
Time and date display Backup
Area/daylight saving time Backup
Time and date Backup
Image quality * CD Backup
Number reset * CD Backup
Shutter sound * CD Backup
ND filter ON/OFF Reset (Set to OFF)
Custom preset ON/OFF Backup
F value set in Av mode Reset
Shutter speed set in Tv mode Reset
F value, shutter speed, and gain set in manual mode Reset
WB data (when set) Backup
Digital zoom position Backup
G Camera menu item settings
AE shift Backup
Movie mode Backup
16 : 9 Backup
Digital zoom magnification Backup
image stabilizer Backup
Zebra pattern Backup
Zebra pattern level Backup
Grip zoom speed Backup
Handle zoom speed Backup
Card size Backup
Clear scan frequency Backup
Custom preset : Color gain Backup
Hue Backup
Sharpness Backup
Setup level Backup
Interval timer setting Reset (Set to OFF)
Interval time Backup
Interval recording time Backup
Viewfinder color adjustment Backup
16 : 9 marker Backup
Guide display Backup
Tally lamp Backup
Standby Backup
Displayed text recording Backup
Time and date setting Backup
* CAM: Camera mode only *CD: Card/Camera (Card Recording) mode only
* Independent: Independent backup for Card Recording mode, Camera mode, and VCR mode
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-65
Item Power switch OFF
G VCR mode
Headphone volume Backup
Speaker volume Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
Zero Set Memory counter value Backup
Data code display ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
Audio 12-bit output selection Reset (set to “Stereo 1”)
Mix balance setting Backup
Photo Search/Date Search/Index search for search selection Reset (changes to “Photo Search”)
G VCR menu item settings
D. Effects selection Backup *Independent
D. Fader *CAM Backup *Independent
D. Effects Backup *Independent
Remote control code Backup
Recording mode setting Backup
Data code setting Backup
Time and date selection setting Backup
LCD brightness adjustment Backup
Text display during playback ON/OFF Backup
Date auto-display ON/OFF Backup
Bilingual Reset (set to “Main + Sub”)
Audio dubbing input Backup
Microphone characteristics Backup
Audio mode Backup
Confirmation beep Backup
Image quality Backup
Number reset Backup
Item Power switch OFF
G Card Playback mode
On screen ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
Data code display ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
G Card Playback menu items
Remote control code Backup
Recording mode Backup
Data code Backup
Time and date selection Backup
LCD brightness adjustment Backup
Text display during playback ON/OFF Backup
Date auto-display ON/OFF Backup
Confirmation beep Backup
Switching the power switch to a different position (VCR mode)
8-4-2 Switching Program AE modes
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-66
Switching Camera modes/switching Program AE modes
Items
Switched to Program AE is selected except
Easy Recording when in Easy Recording mode
G Camera (Tape/Card) mode
F value set in Av mode Backup (Note 1) Backup (Note 1)
Shutter speed set in Tv mode Backup (Note 2) Backup (Note 2)
F value, shutter speed, and gain set in manual mode Backup (Note 3) Backup (Note 3)
Auto focus ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF) Backup
AE lock ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF) Reset
Digital effects options Reset Backup
Digital effects ON/OFF Reset Backup
Optical zoom position Depends on lens Depends on lens
Digital zoom position Backup Backup
White balance (AWB in Easy Recording mode) Backup (Returns to original
setting when Program AE is set
Backup
to something other than Easy
Recording mode)
Custom preset number (Display is off in Easy Backup (Returns to original
Recording mode) setting when Program AE is set
Backup
to something other than Easy
Recording mode)
Custom preset number ON/OFF(OFF in Easy Backup (Returns to original
Recording mode) setting when Program AE is set
Backup
to something other Easy
Recording mode)
Self timer ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF) Reset (set to OFF)
Interval timer ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF) Reset (set to OFF)
On-screen ON/OFF Backup Backup
Information display in EVF Reset (set to normal display) Reset (set to normal display)
LCD backlight ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF) Reset (set to OFF)
Zero Set Memory counter value Backup Backup
G Camera menu item settings
Movie mode Backup Backup
16:9 (OFF in Easy Recording mode) Backup (Returns to original
setting when Program AE is set
Backup
to something other than Easy
Recording mode)
Zebra pattern ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF) Reset (set to OFF)
Zebra pattern level Backup Backup
Grip zoom speed Backup Backup
Handle zoom speed Backup Backup
Clear scan Backup Backup
(Only Tv mode and Manual mode are enabled)
Recording mode Backup Backup
Audio mode Backup Backup
Interval timer setting Reset (set to OFF) Reset (set to OFF)
Interval time Backup Backup
Interval recording time Backup Backup
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-67
Items
Switched to Program AE is selected except
Easy Recording when in Easy Recording mode
Viewfinder color adjustment Backup Backup
16:9 marker Backup Backup
Guide display Backup Backup
Tally lamp Backup Backup
Standby Backup Backup
Displayed text recording Backup Backup
Time and date setting Backup Backup
Area/daylight saving time Backup Backup
Time and date setting Backup Backup
(Note 1) Once the F value is set in Av mode, it will be reset if a button for controlling the exposure (such as AE shift or AE lock ON)
is later set in Av mode or other Program AE mode.
(Note 2) Once the shutter speed in set in Tv mode, it will be reset if a button for controlling the exposure (such as AE shift or AE
lock ON) is later set in Tv mode or other Program AE mode.
(Note 3) Once the F value or shutter speed is set in Manual mode, it will be reset if a button for controlling the exposure (such as AE
shift or AE lock ON) is later set in Manual mode or other Program AE mode.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-68
9. Other features
9-1 Enabled and disabled settings in Program AE mode and Camera mode
Item
Easy
Auto
Tv mode Av mode
Manual Spotlight Surf and EXP lock
Recording
mode mode mode snow ON
mode
AE shift Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Movie mode Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 2)
16:9 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 3)
Digital zoom Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
magnification (Note 11)
Image stabilizer Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 4)
Zebra pattern Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Zebra pattern level Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Grip zoom speed Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Handle zoom speed Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Clear scan frequency Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
selection (Note 9) (Note 10)
Card size Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Clear scan execution Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Color gain Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 5)
Color adjustment Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 6)
Sharpness adjustment Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 7)
Setup level Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 8)
(Note 1) The settings cannot be changed, and the setting item becomes “---”. The operation is automatically set to “±0”.
(Note 2) The settings cannot be changed, and the setting item becomes “---”. The operation is automatically set to “Normal”.
(Note 3) The settings cannot be changed, and the setting item becomes “---”. The operation is automatically set to “OFF”.
(Note 4) The settings cannot be changed, and the setting item becomes “---”. The operation is automatically set to “ON”.
(Note 5) The settings cannot be changed, and the setting item becomes “---”. The operation is automatically set to
“Default value”.
(Note 6) The settings cannot be changed, and the setting item becomes “---”. The operation is automatically set to
“Default value”.
(Note 7) The settings cannot be changed, and the setting item becomes “---”. The operation is automatically set to
“Default value”.
(Note 8) The settings cannot be changed, and the setting item becomes “---”. The operation is automatically set to
“Default value”.
(Note 9) The frequency can only be selected when clear scan is executed in Tv mode.
(Note 10) The frequency can only be selected when clear scan is executed in Manual mode.
(Note 11) The settings cannot be changed, and the setting item becomes “---”. The operation is automatically set to “OFF”.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-69
Item
Easy
Auto
Tv mode Av mode
Manual Spotlight Surf and AE lock
Recording
mode mode mode snow ON
mode
Standby button Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Start/Stop button Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Photo button Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Green/P. AE Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 1)
Tape/Card Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Menu button Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Exposure button AE lock Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled –
Exposure button Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Exposure control (Note 2)
parameter selector
Exposure dial aperture Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
Exposure dial shutter Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
Exposure dial gain Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
White balance select Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
button
White balance set button Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Digital effects select
button/Digital effects
ON/OFF button
Color bar Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Other Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Grip zoom button Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Handle zoom button Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Focus A/M button Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 3)
Focus ring Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
(Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4)
Custom preset execution Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
button
ND filter ON/OFF button Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Custom preset execution Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
button
Custom key button Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Hold lever Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
9-1-1 Enabled and disabled settings in Program AE mode and Switches on camera
(Note 1) The parameter is automatically set to Easy Recording mode.
(Note 2) The available exposure control parameters are aperture, shutter, and gain.
(Note 3) AF mode is automatically selected.
(Note 4) Enabled only when Focus mode is set to Easy Recording Manual Focus mode
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-70
Item
Easy
Auto
Tv mode Av mode
Manual Spotlight Sand and
Recording
mode mode mode snow
mode
Manual focus ring Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Zoom ring Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Image stabilization Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
ON/OFF switch (Note 1)
ND filter ON/OFF switch Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Focus mode selector Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
switch (Note 2)
9-2 Enabled and disabled settings in Program AE and Switches
9-3 System data displays
Camera mode VCR mode
Camera screen REC search DIF input Blue background PB (including
Superb Playback)
Data code × LANC is output × LANC is output × --- × --- K
(timestamp)
Data code × × × F--- etc. × F--- etc. K
(camera data)
Time code K K K Main unit K K
Audio mode K 4-second × K DIF side × K
(12/16 bit) display
Wide/Normal K Setting display × K DIF side × K
CGMS × K K DIF side × K
(warning)
SP/LP K Setting display K K Setting display K Setting display K
* The time code display reads “-.--:--:--” when no tape is inserted or when the camcorder is at an unrecorded tape position.
* CGMS: If the data is copy-protected, it is not output to LINE OUT or the CVF (panel).
9-4 EVF display
In the CVF display, the toggle action is used to select from these options described below.
1. Normal display
2. Recording speed, operation mode, time code counter, and emergency indicator only
3. No display
The following options are available when clock indicator is selected using guide display in the display
settings menu
1. Normal display
2. Recording speed, operation mode, time code counter, emergency indicator, and clock indicator
3. Clock indicator
4. No display
The default is displayed normally.
The onscreen output for line output is also identical.
Operation is enabled for Camera mode only.
The indicators are displayed even if No display is selected for the menu display or full-screen warning
display.
The settings return to their defaults when the power is turned off or when standby is turned off.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-71
9-5 Support for analog signal I/O copyright protection signals
(1) Detection of copyright protection signals added to input signals
• Detected copyright protection signals: Pseudo-synch pulses and CGMSA (Copy Generation Management
System for analog) signals
• Signal detection time: 20 seconds maximum
(2) Copyright protection signals added to output signals
• Macrovision (pseudo-synch pulses): Not added
• CGMSA signals: Not added
9-6 Video ID1 detection/output support
(1) S1 signal output (NTSC and PAL models)
When a Full mode (squeezed) video signal, consisting of 16:9 video compressed to 4:3, is output from the
Sterminal, an S1-compatible wide monitor will detect an identification signal for automatically restoring the 16:9
video (e.g., during playback of a tape recorded in Camera 16:9 mode or a tape containing system data related to
the aspect ratio).
• NTSC → 16:9 Full mode + 4:3 Letter Box mode identification signal output
• PAL → 16:9 Full mode identification signal output
(2) Video ID1/WSS output (video ID is for NTSC models only; WSS* is for PAL models only)
• When a Full mode (squeezed) video signal, consisting of 16:9 video compressed to 4:3, is output from the
composite video terminal or S terminal, a video ID1/WSS-compatible wide monitor will detect an identification
signal for automatically restoring the 16:9 video (e.g., during playback of a tape recorded in Camera 16:9 mode or
a tape containing system data related to the aspect ratio).
WSS : Wide Scree Signaling
(3) Detection of S1 signal or video WSS during line input (ID1 is for NTSC models only; WSS is for PAL
models only)
• A video ID1/S1 or WSS signal multiplexed onto a video signal input from the composite video terminal or
S terminal is detected, and system data relating to aspect ratio information is recorded.
9-7 Closed caption detection and output
(1) Closed caption signal output (NTSC models only)
• When a tape containing closed caption information is played, the closed caption signal is multiplexed onto the
video signal and output.
• Subtitles are displayed on screen by monitors containing a closed caption decoder.
(2) Closed caption signal detection (NTSC models only)
• During recording with analog or digital line input, closed caption information is detected from the input signal
and recorded.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-72
9-8 Custom keys
Frequently-used functions can be assigned to a custom key (special button) which is different for each mode.
The following function can be assigned to the custom key.
Camera mode Camera/Card mode VCR mode Card playback mode
Index recording* Zebra pattern On screen On screen
Zebra pattern On screen Microphone (No display)
VCR stop* Grip zoom speed Microphone ATT
On screen Handle zoom speed Audio input ATT
Microphone Level meter Level meter
Microphone ATT AE shift (No display)
Grip zoom speed Image stabilizer
Handle zoom speed (No display)
Level meter
AE shift
Image stabilizer
(No display)
* : These functions can be used with the custom key only.
9-9 Custom presets
1. Setting
In Camera mode, Custom Preset can be selected in the menu for
changing any of the parameters.
2. Selection and execution
Selection procedure
Press the Custom Preset button (C. Preset). The display in EVF is
toggled from CP to No display.
Execution procedure
Press the Custom Preset button to display CP. When the Custom Preset button is pressed during execution,
custom preset is canceled, the display in EVF is turned off, and the preset operation is not performed.
* The custom preset operation is not performed in Easy Recording mode and the display in EVF is
turned off.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-73
9-10 DV control
1. Operation
If “DV Control ON” is selected in the menu settings, record and record pause control of the DV connected
device is performed using CTS command of the DV input/output by using the camera Start/Stop button
(including remote control, LANC) when in Camera mode only.
a. When the camera is in record ready status, shifting the camera to REC will output a REC
command and shifting the camera to PAUSE will output a PAUSE command.
b. If the camera is in a status not allowing recording, pressing the Start/Stop button
outputs a PAUSE command if the DV connected device operation mode is in recording status
and outputs a REC command if the operation mode is recording stop.
Press the Start/Stop button
DV connected device
operation mode
command command
This product
operation mode
Press the Start/Stop button
DV connected device
operation mode
This product
operation mode
command command
c. Others
DV connected device
operation mode
This product
operation mode
Cassette in
Press the Start/Stop button
command
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-74
2. Menu settings
The settings for the menu during Camera mode are made using “System Settings” DV control.
Regular operation is performed when DV control is set to OFF.
When DV control is set to ON, the above-described DV control operation is performed. The CTS command is
not accepted when DV control is set to ON. The default setting is OFF, and the status is backed up using the
lithium button battery.
3. Display
The indicators shown below are displayed at the bottom right of the screen when DV control is set to ON.
[REC]: When the DV connected device is recording
[STOP]: When the DV connected device is stopped or record paused
[ — — — ]: When the DV connected device is performing an operation other than stop, record pause, or record,
or connected to a device that cannot send commands
(DV IF only flashes): When there is no DV connection
Commands are not output if the DV connected device operation mode is a mode other than PAUSE, STOP,
or REC (such as PLAY or FF).
DV connected device
operation mode
This product
operation mode
Tape end delection
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
1. Functions of P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-1
2. Power Supply Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
2-1 Starting of Power Supply ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
2-2 Power Fuses--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-4
2-3 Power Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5
3. Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-6
3-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
3-2 Signal Processing in Camera Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-7
3-3 Recorder Signal Processing--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-9
3-4 Audio Signal Flow ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-10
4. System Control, Servo -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11
4-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-11
4-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-12
4-3 Servo Control ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-12
4-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-13
4-5 Error Detection ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-14
4-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-14
4-5-2 Processing after Error Detection---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-14
4-6 IC Terminal Functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-15
4-6-1 MAIN MI-COM (IC1054) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-15
4-6-2 FR MI-COM (IC2301) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-20
4-6-3 MODE MI-COM (IC104) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-22
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-1
1. Functions of P.C.B.
(1) MAIN P.C.B.
System-control section
• IC100 E3V REG & RESET : E3V regulator, MODE MI-COM resetting
• IC101 EEPROM : EEPROM for recorder section data
• IC102 LANC INTERFACE : LANC interface
• IC103 RESET : MODE MI-COM power switchover
• IC104 MODE MI-COM : System control
• IC301 MOTOR DRIVE : Drum, capstan, and loading motor driver
• IC302 5.6V REGULATOR : 5.6V regulator for motor driver Camera section
Camera section
• IC1001 2.2V REGULATOR : 2.2 V regulator for camera DSP
• IC1002 3.5V REGULATOR : 3.5 V regulator for camera DSP
• IC1004 DSP : Camera digital signal processing IC
• IC1052 EEPROM : EEPROM for camera section data
• IC1054 CAMERA MI-COM : Camera control
• IC1055 RESET : DSP IC resetting
• IC1202 D/A CONVERTER : D/A converter for camera adjustment
• IC1204 MOTOR DRIVER : AF and zoom motor drive IC
• IC1261 AF IC : Signal processing for AF control
• IC1301 I/F : Interface with recorder signal processing circuit
Video section
• IC2000 VRP2 : Record/play head amplifier
• IC2100 VIF2 : Analog video input/output signal processing
• IC2300 FLASH : FR MI-COM memory
• IC2301 VIC3 : Digital VCR signal processing LSI, IEEE1394 interface
FRMI-COM (mechanism, video/audio control)
• IC2303 SDRAM : VIC3 memory (64M)
• IC2601 CHARACTER GENERATOR: Character generator for CVF/LCD panel display
• IC2903 2.8V REGULATOR : 2.8V regulator
Audio section
• IC705 MIC AMP IC : Microphone amplifier
• IC801 AUDIO ITERFACE : Analog input/output signal processing
• IC802 A/D, D/A : A/D and D/A conversion of audio signal
• IC803 SP DRIVER : Speaker amplifier
• IC804 5V REGULATOR : 5 V Regulator
• IC805 4V REGULATOR : 4V regulator (for speaker amplifier)
USB section
• IC3500 USB CONTROLER : USB interface
• IC3501 SWITCH : Card mode ↔ USB mode changeover switch
Card section
• IC4000 DT4 : Card control and signal processing
• IC4001 SD I/F : IC for interface with memory card
• IC4002 FLASH : Memory for firmware
• IC4003 SDRAM : Card signal processing memory (64M)
• IC4004 2.5 V REGULATOR : 2.5 V regulator
CVF section
• IC1501 EVF DRIVER : EVF LCD (CVF) drive
• IC1502 SWITCH : LCD panel display character mixing switch
PM section
• IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Power PWM regulator controller
• IC3202 4.7V REGULATOR : 4.7V regulator
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-2
(2) CA P.C.B.
Camera section
• IC1004 TIMING GENERATOR : CCD drive timing generator
• IC1054 CDS/AGC/AD : CCD output signal sampling, AGC, A/D converter
• IC1001 V DRIVER : CCD drive (V)
• IC1003 H DRIVER : CCD drive (H)
• IC1006 3.5V REGULATOR : 3.5V regulator
• IC1057 2.8V REGULATOR : 2.8V regulator
(3) C DIAL P.C.B.
The exposure switch is installed.
(4) MJ P.C.B.
The external microphone jack, microphone DC terminal and headphones jack are installed.
(5) CARD P.C.B.
The memory card slot. The memory card slot lid open/close detector switch is installed.
(6) LCD P.C.B.
• IC901 EEPROM : LCD section data EEPROM
• IC902 LCD DRIVE : LCD signal processing, drive
• IC903 DA CONVERTER : LCD control signal D/A converter
• IC4201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Back-light drive
(7) CVF P.C.B.
Signal transfer from MAIN P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, back-light LED turn-on
(8) RKEY P.C.B.
Switches of the recorder system are installed.
(9) CKEY1 P.C.B.
Switches of the camera system and the audio LCD are installed.
(10) CKEY2 P.C.B.
Switches of the camera system and the lithium battery terminal are installed.
(11) CKEY3 P.C.B.
Switches of the audio record level, that of green mode, that of menu and the selector switches are installed.
(12) Lens P.C.B.
The relay board for various signals.
(13) LCD-SW2 P.C.B.
LCD panel open/close detector switch
(14) GY P.C.B.
• IC1601 P SENSOR GYRO : Pitch direction angular velocity detection
• IC1602 Y SENSOR GYRO : YAW direction angular velocity detection
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-3
2. Power Supply circuit
2-1 Startup of Power Supply
3 7
27
28
33
34
60
61
8
4
6
5
107
114
5 2
DET
RESET
SW
SW
POWER SW
E3V
Q101
E3V or LI3V
E3V DET
VCC
CN100
CN3
CN1
VTR CAMERA
LITHIUM
BATTERY
EJECT
SW
VTR POWER SW
VTR ON
PM SECTION
CAM ON
DMC-II
CASSETTE
IN SW
CAMERA POWER SW
EJECT SW
CASSETTE
IN SW
VTR ON
CAM ON
RESET L
LI3 DET
SERIAL DATA
IC2301
FR
MI-COM.
(VIC3)
IC100
E 3V REG.
RESET
IC104
MODE MI-COM.
CN101
IC103
Q100
Q102
Q103
UNREG
P5V
CN82
3V
REG.
2.6V
DET.
29
14
1
1
CN301
50
45
2,5
MAIN P.C.B.
C-KEY2 P.C.B.
C-KEY1 P.C.B.
TRIGGER F.P.C.
12
14
3
4
5
Fig.2-1
• Backup Lithium Battery
LI3V power from the lithium battery is input to pin 3 of the IC100, and it is output from pin 6 as power to the MODE
microcomputer.
Thus, the MODE microcomputer performs data backup and clock operation when main power supply is not con-
nected.
When the voltage of the lithium battery decreases below 2.6 V (or when the lithium battery is not loaded), the IC100
outputs the “L” signal form pin 2. Upon receipt of this signal at the time of power-on, the MODE microcomputer
sends it to the FR microcomputer, which then issue a lithium battery low-level warning indication.
• Main Power Supply
Main power (POW 5V at the time of power-on, UNREG at the time of power-off) is supplied to pin 7 of IC100.
Through the internal regulator in IC100, the main power thus supplied is converted to 3V power, which is output as
E3V from pin 8 of IC100.
Furthermore, through the internal switch, the main power is converted to LI3V, which is output from pin 6 of IC100 as
a power voltage for driving the MODE MI-COM.
Supplied with the main power, IC100 outputs the “L” signal from its pin 4. When the MODE MI-COM receives the
“L” signal, it recognizes that the power supply is loaded. Then, the MODE MI-COM performs initialization to set up
a standby state. In this state, the MODE MI-COM carries out detection of start-related switch signals. Upon detection
of these switch signals, the MODE MI-COM delivers the VCR ON (H) and CAM ON (H) signals from its pins 60 and
61. When the VCR ON (H) and CAM ON (H) signals are output, each circuit power is made active.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-4
2-2 Power Fuses
MAIN P.C.B.
FU3203
CN3201
FU3204
3V,1.7V
FU3201
CAM 3V,LCD 12V,
CCD,VTR UNREG
P 5V,4.7V
FU3205
SERVO
FU3206
DC/DC IC
FU3207
SHOE UNREG
3 BATT +
Battery power is separated into the following five power sources through the five fuses mounted on the MAIN P.C.B.
(1) FU3201
• CAM 3V (Camera section)
• LCD 12V (CVF/LCD section)
• CCD drive power supply
CCD 15V (Camera section)
CCD-7V (Camera section)
• VCR UNREG (System control-Servo section, CVF/LCD section, Audio section)
(2) FU3203
• 3V circuit power source
DVDD 3V (Camera section, System control-Servo section, Video section)
AA 3V (Audio section, Video section)
SDRAM 3V (Video section)
HA 3V (Video sectio)
LCD 3V (CVF/LCD section)
CARD 3V (Card section, System control-Servo section)
• 1.7V systems power supply
CAM 1.7V (Camera section)
DVDD 1.7V (Video section)
(3) FU3204
• P 5V (Camera section, System control-Servo section, Audio section, CVF/LCD section)
• 4.7V systems power supply
DVDD 4.7V (System control-Servo section)
VIF 4.7V (Video section)
HA 4.7V (Video section)
(4) FU3205
• DRUM VS (System control-Servo section)
• CAPSTAN VS (System control-Servo section)
(5) FU3206
Power supply for DC/DC IC (IC3201)
(6) FU3207
Power supply for accessory shoe
Fig. 2-2
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-5
Fig. 2-3
2-3 Power Circuit
Various power supply circuits are shown in Fig. 2-3.
ON/OFF of the various power supply circuits are controlled by the VCR ON signal and the CAM ON signal that are
output from the MODE MI-COM, and also controlled by the CCD ON signal that is output from CAMERA MI-COM.
I C3201
DC/ DC
CONVERTER
CONTROL
REG. 64
5
PWM LCD 12V
Q3201
Q3202
Q3210
50
46
Q3204
REG. LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
4. 7V
REG
PWM
CONTROL
CH- 1
UNREG
VTR ON
CH- 1, CH- 3, CH4, CH8 ON/ OFF
CH- 5, CH- 6 ON/ OFF
CH- 2, ON/ OFF
CH- 7, ON/ OFF
CAM ON
CCD ON
DVDD 1. 7V
CCD 15V
DVDD 3V
AA 3V
SDRAM 3V
HA 3V
CARD 3V
LCD 3V
CAM 1. 7V
56
40
Q3206
Q3215
REG. PWM
UNREG
CCD 15V
CCD - 7V
62
11
Q3203
T3201
REG. PWM
UNREG
P 5V
DVDD 4. 7V
VI F 4. 7V
HA 4. 7V
I C3202
57
37
Q3207
REG. PWM
UNREG
UNREG
VTR ON
53
43
Q3205
REG. LPF PWM CH- 2
CH- 3
CH- 4
CH- 8
CH- 7
UNREG
CAM 3V
28
30
29
31
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-6
Fig. 2-4
LENS
CARD
P.C.B.
CA
P.C.B.
LCD
P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
MEMORY
CARD
IC1004
DSP
IC1005
MEGA
IC1301
IF
IC4001
SD I/F
IC4003
SDRAM
IC3500
USB
CONTROLER
IC2000
VRP2
IC2303
SDRAM
LCD
CVF
LCD
REC/PB
HEAD
IC2601
CG
IC1502
CG
MIX
IC1501
EVF
DRIVER
IC902
LCD
DRIVER
IC2100
VIF2
AV
USB
TERMINAL
DV
TERMINAL
MIC
SPEAKER
IC801
AIF
IC705
MIC
AMP
IC803
SP
AMP
JACK
R-KEY
P.C.B.
F.P.C.
VIDEO
AUDIO
IC4000
DT4
IC3501
VIC
DIF
FR
MI-COM.
IC1054
CDS
AGC
A/D
IC1004
TG IC2301
VIC3
IC802
A/D
D/A
C-KEY2
P.C.B.
C-KEY2
P.C.B.
PRISM
B-CCD
IC1003
H-
DRIVER
IC1001
V-
DRIVER
R-CCD
G-CCD
3. Signal Processing Circuit
3-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit
Figure 2-4 shows the entire block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-7
3-2 Signal Processing in Camera Unit
Fig. 2-5
MEMORY
CARD
IC4003
SDRAM
IC4001
SD I/F
IC1301
I/F
TO
8
/
IC4000
DT4
8
/ Y
8
/ C
IC1004
DSP
8
/ Y
8
/ C
IC1054
CDS
AGC
A/D
10
/ G
10
/ B
10
/ R IC2301
VIC3
R
CCD
IC1004
TIMING
GENERATOR
IC1001
V-DRIVER
IC1003
H-DRIVER
LENS
G
C
C
D
B
C
C
D
CA P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
<CCD>
size : 1/4-inch CCD × 3 (3 CCD)
470,000 pixels (440,000 pixels effective)
Filter : RGB independent primary color filter
Method of separating colors : Prism + dichroic filter
< CCD Drive Circuit >
The reason why the vertical driver pulse dedicated for the G-CCD is used, is that the electrical pixel shifting in the
vertical direction requires the dedicated driver.
< CDS, ANALOG-PROCESS and A/D Circuits >
Each of the R, G and B signals output from the CCDs passes through CDS (sampling),
AGC and A/D converter inside IC1054 respectively, converted to the 10-bit digital signal
and are sent to the DSP IC (IC1004).
< DSP Circuit>
In the DSP IC (IC1004), the R, G and B signal converted in 10-bit digital form are subjected to Y (luminance signal)/
C (R-Y, B-Y color difference signal) processing. The CCD vertical pixel shift processing is performed in this camcorder
as aforementioned, thereby enabling swichover between normal field movie and frame movie.
For normal field movie pictures, the normal luminance signal without RGB signal shift is output as the YA signal. For
frame movie pictures, there is a vertical-direction 1/2-line shift between the G signal and the R/B signal received from
the CCDs due to vertical pixel shift processing. Subjected to matrix calculation processing in the DSP IC, the lumi-
nance signal is taken out with two field pictures YA and YB in a cycle of 1/60 second. Then, the YA and YB signals
are recorded in using the internal field memory.
Each Y/C output signal from the DSP IC is sent to the next-stage DT4 (IC4000) through the 8-bit parallel signal line.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-8
< Interface Circuit>
The Y/C signal output from the DSP IC cannot be input intactly to the VIC of the recorder circuit. Therefore, in the I/
F IC (IC 1107), the received Y/C parallel signal is converted into 27MHz 8-bit serial data, which is then output to the
recorder section.
< Still Picture Processing Circuit >
In the card mode, the JPEG compression/decompression and the card mix processing are performed in IC4000 (DT4).
In the tape mode, the Y/C parallel signal passes through IC4000 (DT4) but this correction is not applied to the signal.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-9
3-3 Recorder Signal Processing
Fig. 2-6
AV JACK
S TERMINAL
CVF
LCD
LCD
IC1301
I/F
VIDEO
INTERFACE
R,G,B
D/A A/D
IC2303
SDRAM
REC/PB
PROCESS
IC2100
VIF2
ECC
COMPRESSION
/DEMOD.
BUS
IC2301
VIC3
VIC BLOCK DIF BLOCK
MI-COM. BLOCK
SDRAM
INTERFACE
DIF
INTERFACE
FR MI-COM.
AUDIO
INTERFACE
IC2000
VRP2
DV
TERMINAL
AV
JACK
IC801
AIF
VIDEO
HEAD
< VIC3 > IC2301
• The video data and signals input to VIC3 are subjected to digital VCR format signal processing. Audio data,
subcode data and ITI data are also created at VIC3, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of
DV format.
• DIF : After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal.
At digital input, the data enters VIC3 signal processing circuit via the opposite route.
< VRP2 > IC2000
Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC3 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while
undergoing head switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified
and sent to VIC3.
< VIF2 > IC2100
Y and C signals sent from VIC3 are output as Y, C signals for S terminal and composite video.
At line input, input signals undergo level adjustment, sync signal separation and are output to VIC3.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-10
3-4 Audio Signal Flow
Fig. 2-7
IC2301
VIC3
IC2000
VRP2
SPEAKER
64fs
+
-
L
R
IC703
IC702
IC704
EXT
MIC
L
R
R
L
L
R
LPF AMP
AMP
INT,
MIC UNIT
AMP
AMP
AMP
AMP
AMP
REC/
PB
HEAD
IC802
A/D
D/A
IC705
MIC
AMP
IC803
SPEAKER
AMP
IC801
AIF
L2
R2
R1
L1
HEAD
PHONE
L
R
AV
JACK
L
R
< MIC AMP (IC705) >
It performs signal amplification and wind-cut processing.
< AIF ( IC801)>
This is the audio analog signal processing IC. It performs ALC (Auto Level Control), fading, output to terminals and
speakers and input/output with A/D, D/A.
< A/D, DA (IC802) >
It performs analog-to-digital conversion. Sampling frequency is output from VIC3 and is Fs=32 KHz or Fs=48 KHz
depending on the audio mode.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-11
4. System Control, Servo
4-1 Outline of System Control, Servo
Figure 2-8 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control
is mainly performed by the MAIN MI-COM (IC103) on MAIN P.C.B.
DMC II
CA P.C.B.
MAIN
P.C.B.
LCD P.C.B.
TRIGGER
F.P.C.
C-KEY2
P.C.B.
C-KEY1 P.C.B.
PT F.P.C
JACK F.P.C R-KEY F.P.C
HEAD
REMOTE
CONTROL
SIGNAL
RECEIVER
M
FG/PG
DRUM
CAPSTAN
LOADING
FG
M
M
IC1004
TG
IC901
EEPROM
ZOOM
SW
START
/STOP
SW
EJECT
SW
C-DIAL
P.C.B.
EXP. SW
POWER SW
DE SW
AF SW
ND SW
WB SW
IC902
LCD
DRIVER
IC1501
EVF
DRIVER
IC601
CG
IC1303
EEPROM
IC1261
AF
IC
IC1004
DSP
IC1204
MOTOR
DRIVER
IC3200
DC/DC
CONVERTER
IC1054
CAMERA
MI-COM
IC4000
DT4
IC4002
FLASH
VIC
IC103
MODE
MI-COM
IC2100
VIF2
IC801
AIF
LANC
JACK
IC2000
VRP2
IC2300
FLASH
IC2300
USB
CONTROLER
IC102
LANC
I/F
MEMORY
CARD
IC1054
CDS
AGC
A/D
LENS
PWM D
PWM C
IC301
MOTOR
DRIVER IC2301
VIC3
CAPSTAN
DRIVER
DRUM
DRIVER
MODE SW
C.DOWN SW
BOT/EOT
SENSOR
DEW SENSOR
REEL FG
MIC
R-KEY
LOADING
DRIVER
D-VS
C-VS
DFG/PG
CFG
C-KEY3
P.C.B.
MENU SW
GREEN SW
ADIO SW
FR
MI-COM
Fig. 2-8
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-12
4-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer
(1) FR MI-COM (VIC3)
The FR MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through
communi-cation with CAMERA MI-COM. It also detects of various sensors and switches (DMCII). Following are
the major functions.
• VIC (Video) VIF2 (Video Interface) control / AIF3 (Audio Interface) controls / DIF (Digital Interface) controls
• Control in accordance with IEEE1394
• DMCII mechanism control
(2) MODE MI-COM (IC103)
The MODE MI-COM is mainly in charge of the power-on sequence and charging control. Following are the major
functions.
• Key input
• LANC communication
• LCD / EVF control
• OSD (On Screen Display) control
• Remote control input
• Power ON/OFF control
• Built-in charge circuit control
• MIC (Memory In Cassette) control
(3) CAMERA MI-COM (IC1054)
Carries out lens control and camera signal processing. Following are the major functions.
• CCD drive control
• DSP IC control
• AE, AWB control
• OIS (Optical Image Stabilizer) control
• Zoom key input
(4) AF IC (IC1261)
The AF IC generates the signal for auto focus control.
(The auto focus control is performed by the CAMERA MI-COM.)
4-3 Servo Control
Servo control is carried out by the VIC3 (VIC and FR MI-COM). The FR MI-COM is used for servo control of motor
ON/OFF and rotational direction, and the VIC is used to output rotational speed and phase control signals. More
specifically in terms of signal flow, the VIC detects the FG/PG and PB-RF signals from the motor, and sends the
detected signal information to the FR MI-COM.
Then, the FR MI-COM generates an error signal to be output to the VIC. Thereafter, the VIC outputs an error signal
(PWM), which is driven on the PM section for sending a control voltage to the motor driver IC.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-13
4-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode
Fig. 2-9
IC3501
G-CCD IC1054
CDS
AGC
A/D
Card damera mode of signal flow
Personal computer connection mode
of signal flow
IC1004
DSP
IC4000
DT4
IC1301
SD I/F
IC2301
FR MI-COM.
(VIC3)
FLASH
ROM
IC3500
USB
CONTROLER
MEMORY
CARD
USB
TERMINAL
R-CCD
B-CCD
In the card camera mode, an image signal produced in the camera section is sent to the memory card via the DT4
(IC4000), SD I/F (IC1301). In the personal computer connection mode, the USB terminal and the memory card are
connected through the USB controller (IC3500).
The FR MI-COM performs control of changeover between the card camera mode and the personal computer connec-
tion mode. The USB controller (IC3500), and IC3501 (SWITCH) are also controlled by the FR MI-COM.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-14
Kind
Drum error
Capstan error
Reel error
Loading error
Condition
Error detecting mode
FG frequency when
steady
Error detecting level
Error detecting time
Error detecting mode
FG frequency when
steady
Error detecting level
Error detecting time
Error detecting mode
Error detection
Error detecting mode
Error detection
Starting/steady
900Hz
Starting : Beyond 80 -150%.
Steady : 30% or less.
Starting : 5 sec.
Steady : 0.5 sec.
Starting /Steady
1347Hz
Starting : 80% or less.
Steady : 100 Hz or less.
Starting : 2 sec.
Steady : 0.5 sec.
Normal /UNLOAD
Normal : C-FG Number per reel FG cycle is 2.4 × 1347
or more.
UNLOAD : Reel FG half cycle is 1 sec or more
(Take-up reel only for both)
Mode transfer
Mode transfer time
STANDBY-STOP : 6sec
STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec
STOP-PLAY : 3sec
Detection
D-FG
C-FG
T, S-REEL FG
C-FG
Mode SW
Loading During tape
Cassette in Loading During loading
completed running
During mode
Drum error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Capstan error Pop up ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Reel error ------- ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Loading error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop ------- Error stop
4-5 Error Detection
If an anomality has been occurred in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters.
The LCD indicates “PLEASE UNLOAD THE CASSETTE” and blinks “EJECT”.
4-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions
The following table gives error detecting conditions.
4-5-2 Processing after Error Detection
The following table gives processing after error detection.
• Pop up : Error display→ error eject→ pop up→ error clear
• Error stop : Error display→ STOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-15
4-6 IC Terminal Functions
4-6-1 CAMERA MI-COM (IC1054)
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
PG BK ADDR Data Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
ZOOMT_KEY I “Zoom key (T direction) “L” 5 0 0AF5 7
ZOOMW_KEY I “Zoom key (W direction) “L” 5 0 0AF5 6
CDIAL_CW I “Dial “L” 5 0 0AF5 5
CDIAL_CCW I “Dial “L” 5 0 0AF5 4
VSS I Digital GND terminal.
NDSW_KEY I ND ON/OFF key 5 0 0AF5 3
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
CDIAL_KEY I Dial push key 5 0 0AF4 7
GAINSW_KEY I WB SET execution key 5 0 0AF4 6
N.C. O
WB_KEY I WB mode SEL key 5 0 0AF4 4
VDDH I Digital power supply terminal
AF_KEY I AF ON/OFF key 5 0 0AF4 3
N.C. O
FOCUS_KEY0 I Focus dial key 5 0 0AF4 1
FOCUS_KEY1 I Focus dial key 5 0 0AF4 0
TG_SLEEPO TG energy-saving mode control
CAMCARD_OFF2 O Energy-saving control 1
CAMCARD_OFF1 O Energy-saving control 0
VSS I Digital GND terminal
MEMO_END I
WINK_END O
THRUL O
DSP RESET O DSP MEGA IC reset
DSYCLK O System clock
DRWSEL O Read/write selector signal
DAS O Address strobe signal
VDDB I Digital power supply terminal
MAD15 I/O
MAD14 I/O
MAD13 I/O
MAD12 I/O
MAD11 I/O
MAD10 I/O
MAD9 I/O
MAD8 I/O
VSS I Digital GND terminal
MAD7 I/O
MAD6 I/O
MAD5 I/O
MAD4 I/O
MAD3 I/O
MAD2 I/O
MAD1 I/O
MAD0 I/O
VDDB I Digital power supply terminal
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-16
N.C. O
RE O Memory read signal
WEH O Memory write signal
WEL O Memory write signal
PVDD I PLL power supply terminal.
PVSS I PLL GND terminal.
MMOD1 I Memory extension mode selection
MMOD0 I Memory extension mode selection
RESET I Reset input terminal
FRQS I
VSS I Digital GND terminal.
EXMOD1 I Memory extension mode selection
EXMOD0 I Memory extension mode selection
OSCI I
OSCO O
VDDH I Digital GND terminal.
SYSCLK O System clock output
N.C. O
C_BAR_SEL O Color bar selector
C_BAR_SW O Color bar ON/OFF switch
IFNPSW O I/F NTSC PAL selector switch
VDD I Digital power supply terminal.
IF_POC O I/F IC Power On clear
HD RST O HD reset
DA_LD O DA load
AFIC_CS O AF IC CS
AFIC_RST O AF IC reset
VSS I Digital GND terminal.
IRIS_CL O Iris forced close
IRIS_GAIN O Iris dump OFF signal
ND_GAIN O ND dump OFF signal
ND_DRIVE O
X_CG_CS O CG CS
VDDH I Digital power supply terminal.
X_PC_REQ O For AF signal investigation
X_PC_ACK O For AF signal investigation
X_PC_CS O For AF signal investigation
AVSS I Analog GND terminal.
— I
— I
— I
— I
— I
— I
— I
FLDET I Flicker component detection
TEMP I Temperature sensor detection
ZOOM_KEY I Zoom key
I_ENC I Iris encoder
ND_ENC I ND encoder
P_PSD I
Y-PSD I
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
PG BK ADDR Data Bit
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-17
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
PG BK ADDR Data Bit
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
P_GYRO I Pitch gyro output
Y_GYRO I YAW gyro output
VREFH I A/D converter reference voltage
AVDD I Analog GND terminal
N.C. O
NMI I
VSS I Digital GND terminal
N.C. O
VTOC_EN I VIC3 interrupt
MTOC_EN I MAIN MI-COM interrupt
XSG_INTI CCD read-out interrupt
AVEF_INT I Strobe interrupt
BEND_INT I DSP interrupt
V1V2_INT I DSP interrupt
VD_INT I VD interrupt
VDD I Digital GND terminal
CCC O Strobe
STON O Strobe
I_ISW O
F_RES_SW I
Z_RES_SWO I
Z_RES_SW1 I
F_PSB O
Z_PSB O
VSS I Digital GND terminal
LED_RET0 O
LED_RET1 O
LED_RET2 O
CTOV_RX O
CTOV_EN O Communication request signal
NT_XPAL_SEL I EEPROM initial NTSC/PAL selection
EEP_INI I EEPROM initial request
EEP_CS O Chip select for EEPROM communication
AGCCS O AGC communication chip select
VDDH I Digital power supply terminal.
AGCRST O AGC reset
N.C. O
N.C. O
P_PWM O
Y_PWM O
VIC_FRAME O Still picture read timing control
VIC_FREEZE O Still picture read timing control
VIC_PARALLEL O Still picture read timing control
ADJ CS O ADJ CS
VSS I Digital GND terminal
ADJ_REQ I VCR monitor
ADJ_SW I ADJ MODE selection
CTOM_RX O
CTOM_EN O
FLRST O Flicker component reset pulse
VDD I Digital power supply terminal
TG_CS O Chip select for TG communication
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-18
TG_NP_SW O NTSC/PAL selection
VTOC_LATCH I For data latch
DVSW_CAM O
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
VSS I Digital GND terminal
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
VDD I Digital power supply terminal
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
VSS I Digital GND terminal
N.C. O
N.C. O
N.C. O
STSP O
EFID O
AVEF I
VDDH I Digital power supply terminal
CTVCR_CLK O
CTVCR_DATA O
VCRTC_DATA O
N.C. O
VDDH I Digital power supply terminal
N.C. O
VSS I Digital GND terminal
MTOC_CLK I
CTOM_DATA O
MTOC_DATA I
VTOC_CLK I
CTOV_DATA O
VDD I Digital power supply terminal
VTOC_DATA I
CTOE_CLK O
CTOE_DATA O
ETOC_DATA I
N.C. O
VSS I Digital GND terminal
N.C. O
N.C. O
CAM_SCLK1 O
CAM_SO1 O
CAM_SI1 I
CAM_SCLK0 O
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
PG BK ADDR Data Bit
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-19
VDDH I Digital power supply terminal
CAM_SO0 O
N.C. O
N.C. O
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
PG BK ADDR Data Bit
205
206
207
208
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-20
4-6-2 FR MI-COM (IC2301)
LM RST O Reset output of level meter IC 7 0 **D0 7
V3TOM PC O PC mode communication: PC mode starts. 7 0 **D0 4
USB EN O TELUSBIC Enable 7 0 **D0 1
CAM SI I Serial data input 7 0 **D7 5
LINE IN O Line input control 7 0 **D4 6
LM CS O Chip select of level meter IC 7 0 **D4 2
VIF CS O VIF communication Chip Select (cp.c) 7 0 **D4 0
HP CTL O Headphone output muting 7 0 **D1 0
SHUTTER O PWM output for effect sound (AUDIO. C.CP.C) 7 0 **D6 4
PWM ZA O PWM signal for zoom motor control 7 0 **D6 3
UNLOAD O Lmo Unload 7 0 **D1 6
DRUM ON O Drum ON 7 0 **D1 2
CAS IN I Cassette IN detection
HP ON O Headphones/AV jack selector (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 6
SP MUTE O Muting the built-in speaker (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 2
TREEL I TreeIFG input
V3TOM FILE TX O PC mode communication: File transfer in progress. 7 0 **D0 5
MODE SCK I Mode microcomputer serial communication clock 7 0 **D8 0
PLUG IN I AV Jack Detect 7 0 **D4 3
VTOC EN (CAM CS) O Chip select of camera microcomputer 7 0 **D5 6
DA CFG O CFG duty control voltage output 7 0 **D6 6
PWM ZB O PWM signal for zoom motor control 7 0 **D6 2
LOAD O Lmo Load 7 0 **D1 5
CAP ON O Capstan ON 7 0 **D5 4
USB CS O Chip Select for USB 7 0 **D9 2
WIDE DET I SI SIDE detection
DEW AD I DEW detection
SST3 (DIC FRAME) I Camera video control: Frame picture 7 0 **D3 3
SP STBY O Save-energy bias mode of built-in speaker (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 3
XPDI O DA converter power-down (Audio. C) 7 0 **D3 1
CAP FWD O Capstan forward rotation 7 0 **D8 6
CTOV COM I Camera microcomputer communication 7 0 **D9 5
CTOV RX I Select of camera microcomputer communication 7 0 **D9 4
MTOV3 PC I PC mode communication: PC mode acknowledged 7 0 **D0 3
USB DET I USB Detect 7 0 **D0 0
CAM SCK O Serial communication clock 7 0
CAM SO O Serial output data 7 0 **D8 1
MODE SI I Mode control reception data 7 0 **D7 4
LET CONT O Letter Box output control (VBI.C) 7 0 **D4 4
AIF CS O AIF communication Chip Select (cp.C) 7 0 **D5 7
EXT MUTE O External microphone mute control 7 0 **D5 0
PWM FB O PWM signal for focus motor control 7 0 **D6 0
TAPE LED O Tape sensor output LED control 7 0 **D1 3
NTSC XPAL I NTSC/PAL switching (System Control. C) 7 0 **D5 3
TAPE END AD Tape End detection
EXT DET I External microphone detection (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 5
REC PROOF I Cassette recording prohibition signal detection
MSW AD I Mechanism position detection
USB INT I USB interrupt
HP DET I Headphones installation detection 7 0
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
PG BK ADDR Data Bit
9
10
11
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
26
27
48
58
59
68
101
104
107
108
110
111
116
117
131
136
138
145
146
147
152
170
171
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
194
198
199
200
201
208
210
214
216
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-21
HP MUTE O Headphones output muting (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 4
SST2 (DIC PARARRIL) I Camera video control; A/B parallel read-out 7 0 **D3 2
VCO HI O VRP VCO control 7 0 **D2 0
SREEL I SreelFG input
SOUND SW O Input selector of speaker driver IC 7 0 **D0 6
VIF/AIF SCK O VIF/AIF serial communication clock 7 0 **D8 2
CTOV CATEGORY I Communication category 7 0 **D7 6
WIDE CONT O Wide (16:9) output control (VBI.D) 7 0 **D4 5
MODE REQ O Mode microcomputer communication Chip Select (cp.C) 7 0 **D5 5
DA SREEL O ReelFG control voltage output 7 0 **D6 7
PWM FA O PWM signal for focus motor control 7 0 **D6 1
REEL LED CONT O ReelFG output LED control 7 0 **D1 4
VTOC LATCH O Camera microcomputer communication 7 0 **D5 2
MODE CS O Mode serial communication CS interrupt
AUTO MANUAL I Detecting of audio input (AUTO/MANUAL) 7 0
SHOE ON O Video light ON (va.C) 7 0 **D3 4
CARD BUS SEL O Card bus connection selection 7 0 **D0 2
VIF/AIF SO O VIF/AIF serial send data 7 0 **D7 2
MODE SO O Mode microcomputer serial send data 7 0 **D7 0
SDET I S-terminal Detect
SHOE O Shoe (microphone) power control 7 0 **D4 1
INT MUTE O Built-in microphone mute control 7 0 **D5 1
SHOE ID1 I SHOE (microphone/light... ) detection
TAPE TOP AD I Tape Top detection
SST 1 (DIC FREEZE) I Camera video control: Freeze request 7 0 **D2 7
A MUTE O Audio mute (AIF/Line Out) (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 1
REC MUTE O Fixing the AIF3 AD data to the soundless level 7 0 **D4 7
(Audio. C) 7 0 **D3 0
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
220
224
226
232
259
261
262
263
264
265
266
270
271
283
284
292
319
321
322
323
324
325
339
341
346
347
348
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-22
4-6-3 MODE MI-COM (IC104)
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
PG BK ADDR Data Bit
3
4
5
6
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
68
69
BATT A/D A/D Battery low-voltage detection 7 2 **C0 A/D
BATT INFO A/D A/D Battery type detection 7 2 **C1 A/D
LI3V DETECT A/D Lithium battery low-voltage detection 7 2 **C2 A/D
N.C.
CASSETTEMEMORY A/D0 A/D Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 2 **C4 A/D
CASSETTEMEMORY A/D1 A/D Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 2 **C5 A/D
CASSETTEMEMORY A/D2 A/D Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 2 **C6 A/D
KEY AD0 A/D KEY 0 detection 7 2 **C7 A/D
KEY AD1 A/D KEY 1 detection 7 2 **C8 A/D
KEY AD2 A/D KEY 2 detection 7 2 **C9 A/D
KEY AD3 A/D KEY 3 detection 7 2 **CA A/D
FCH0 I Process mode/software debug terminal 7 2 **CB A/D
KEY AD4 A/D KEY 4 detection 7 2 **CC A/D
CARD OPN I Card lid open/close detection 7 2 **CD A/D
CARD DET I Card yes/no 7 2 **CE A/D
CARD PRO I Card protect 7 2 **CF A/D
VCR POWER SWITCH I VCR mode switch 7 2 **D0 0
CAM POWER SWITCH I Camera mode switch 7 2 **D0 1
T/C PW SW I TAPE/CARD/SWITCH 7 2 **D0 2
V3TOM FILE TX I PC mode: File transfer in progress 7 2 **D0 3
STANDBY SW I Standby switch detection 7 2 **D0 4
LANC POWER ON I LANC POWER ON detection 7 2 **D0 5
EJECT SWITCH I EJECT switch detection 7 2 **D0 6
CASSETTE IN SWITCH I CASSETTE-IN switch detection 7 2 **D0 7
PHOTO SWITCH I Memory switch full pressing detection 7 2 **D1 0
HARF PHOTO SWITCH I Memory switch half pressing detection 7 2 **D1 1
START STOP I Trigger switch 7 2 **D1 2
PAE/GREEN SW I PAE mode selector switch 7 2 **D1 3
PANEL OPEN SWITCH I Panel open switch detection 7 2 **D1 4
PANEL BOTTOM/TOP SWITCH I Panel BOTTOM/TOP switch detection 7 2 **D1 5
DIAL CW SWITCH I Dial detection 7 2 **D1 6
DIAL CCW SWITCH I Dial detection 7 2 **D1 7
VCR POW LED O VCR LED lighting control 7 2 **D2 0
CAM POW LED O Camera LED lighting control 7 2 **D2 1
NTSC/PAL O NTSC/PAL 7 2 **D2 2
MEMORY ACCESS LED O Card access LCD 7 2 **D2 3
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
OSDC CS O OSD IC chip select 7 2 **D3 0
LCD ON O LCD panel ON/OFF control 7 2 **D3 1
VCR POWER ON O VCR power control 7 2 **D3 2
CAM ON O CAMERA CCD control 7 2 **D3 3
EVF SEN O EVF IC chip select 7 2 **D3 4
LCD CEN O LCD panel IC chip select 7 2 **D3 5
LCD BL ON O Panel backlight ON/OFF control 7 2 **D3 6
DSU 7 2 **D3 7
VIC3 CHIP SELECT O VIC3 CHIP SELECT 7 2 **D4 0
N.C. O
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-23
N.C. O
MTOC EN O Camera microcomputer communication acknowledged 7 2 **D4 3
LANC CONT O LANC power control 7 2 **D4 4
DSU 7 2 **D9 0
DSU 7 2 **D9 1
DSU 7 2 **D9 2
DSU 7 2 **D9 3
DSU 7 2 **D9 4
DSU 7 2 **D9 5
DSU 7 2 **D9 6
DSU 7 2 **D9 7
DT4 WAKE UP DT4 rise-up 7 2 **DA 0
DT4 BUSY DT4 busy 7 2 **DA 1
CAM RXDATA I Camera microcomputer reception request 7 2 **DA 2
RMC PULSE IN I [Interrupt] remote control signal input 7 2 **DA 3
DT4 I FRP 7 2 **DA 4
N.C.
V3TOM PC I In the PC mode. 7 2 **DA 6
MTOV3 PC O PC mode acknowledged 7 2 **DA 7
MODE EEPROM CS O Mode EEPROM CHIP SELECT 7 2 **DC 0
LCD DA LOAD O DA loading for LCD panel 7 2 **DC 1
PANEL EEPROM CS O Panel EEPROM CHIP SELECT 7 2 **DC 2
N.C.
N.C.
EEPROM RESET O EEPROM reset 7 2 **DC 6
MIRR O Panel OSD off in the mirror mode 7 2 **DC 7
LANC OUT O LANC data output 7 2 **DF 0
LANC IN I LANC data input 7 2 **DF 1
XRESET O VIC 7 2 **DF 2
CASSETTE MEMORY ON O Cassette memory power supply control 7 2 **DF 3
CASSETTE MEMORY SDA I/O CM communication data terminal 7 2 **DF 4
CASSETTE MEMORY SCL O CM communication clock terminal 7 2 **DF 5
E3DET I [Interrupt] E3V low-voltage detection 7 2 **DF 6
32.768KHz 7 2 **DD 6
32.769KHz 7 2 **DD 7
DT4 RESET O DT4 reset 7 2 **DB 0
DT4 RESET LSI O DT4 LSI reset 7 2 **DB 1
N.C.
N.C.
EVF ON O EVF ON 7 2 **DB 4
EVF BL ON O EVF BL ON 7 2 **DB 5
PS O Charging POWER SAVE control 7 2 **DB 6
VIC3 RESUEST [Interrupt] VIC3 communication request 7 2 **DB 7
VIC3 SERIAL DATA OUT VIC3 serial data output 7 2 **DD 0
(MODE TO VIC3)
VIC3 SERIAL DATA IN I VIC3 serial data input 7 2 **DD 1
(VIC3 TO MODE)
VIC3 SERIAL CLOCK O VIC3 serial clock output 7 2 **DD 2
CAMERA SERIAL DATA OUT O 7 2 **DD 3
(MODE TO CAMERA)
CAMERA SERIAL DATA IN I CAMERA serial data input 7 2 **DD 4
(CAMERA TO MODE)
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
92
93
94
95
96
98
99
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
115
116
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
128
129
130
131
132
133
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-24
CAMERA SERIAL CLOCK O CAMERA serial clock output 7 2 **DD 5
SERIAL OUT O DT4 serial data output 7 2 **DE 0
SERIAL IN I DT4 serial data input 7 2 **DE 1
SERIAL CLOCK O DT4 serial data clock 7 2 **DE 2
SERIAL OUT OSDC/EEPROM/EVF IC/LCD... 7 2 **DE 3
SERIAL IN EEPROM 7 2 **DE 4
SERIAL CLOCK OSDC/EEPROM/EVF IC/LCD... 7 2 **DE 5
CTOM EN [Interrupt] Camera communication request 7 2 **DE 7
Pin Name I/O Function
Remarks
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
142
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR

SERVICE HINTS
CONTENTS
1. Lists of Maintenance Tools and Supplies ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-1
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-1
1-2 List of Supplies ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-1
2. Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
2-1 Setting A ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-2
2-2 Setting B------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-3
3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000) ---------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
4. Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-5
4-1 General -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
4-2 Service Mode Indications ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
5. Description of Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-6
5-1 Error Rate ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-6
5-2 Mechanical Error Indications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-7
5-3 Cleaning mode------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-8
5-4 Camera Special Commands -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-9
5-5 Checking The Lens Resetting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10
5-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches ------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10
5-6-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10
6. Service Hints ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11
6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11
6-2 Location of Main Elements -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-12
6-3 Current Consumption Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-13
7. Trouble Shooting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-14
7-1 Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-14
7-2 Camera Picture Faulty -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-14
7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-15
-
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-1
1. Lists of Maintenance Tools and Supplies
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools
1-2 List of Supplies
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks
Diamond oil/Hydro-Fluid NT-68 DY9-3010-000 Lubrication DMC II
To be locally purchased
in USA
Grease GB-12 DY9-3022-000 Lubrication DMC II
Grease FLOIL C-1Z DY9-3039-000 Lubrication DMC II
Three Bond No. 1401C CY9-8011-000 Adhesive DMC-II
Logenest Lambda A-74 CY9-8102-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease GE-C9 CY9-8043-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease GC-X5 CY9-8082-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease FLOIL 92 KB CY9-8097-000 Lubrication Lens
Hanarl KS-50M DY9-3047-000 Lubrication Cover, DMC-II
Dia Bond No. 1663G CY9-8129-000 Adhesive LCD
Sponge (W × H × T : 300mm × 200mm × 6mm) DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration
isolating/sound absorbing
material
Adhesive tape, No. 354E DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape
(W

×

L

×

T : 9mm

×

50m

×

0.15mm, UL type)
Adhesive tape, No. 501F DY9-3034-000 General-purpose double-side-
(W

×

L

×

T : 10mm

×

50m

×

0.16mm, UL type) coated adhesive tape
Sheet, Shield (W × H : 250mm
×
250mm) DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks
Alignment Tape (Color bar master/NTSC) DY9-1321-000 Recorder electrical adjustment
Alignment tape (tracking) DY9-1345-000 Tape path adjustment DMC II
Cassette Torque gauge for DV DY9-1346-000 Tape path adjustment DMC II
Cleaning tape (normal) — Head cleaning DMC II
Commercially available
DV cleaning tape (hard) DY9-1359-000 Head cleaning DMC II
Extension cable DY9-1375-000 Test pin extension
CZ Siemens chart DY9-1372-000 CZ adjustment
Driver bit for tape path adjustment DY9-2053-000 Tape path adjustment DMC II
Color bar chart DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Color Viewer 5600°K for 100V DY9-2039-220 Camera electrical adjustment
(for 220V)
Color Viewer 5600°K for 115V DY9-2039-240 Camera electrical adjustment
(for 240V)
Lamp for Color Viewer 5600°K DY9-2040-000 Replacement
Filter, CCA W12ø 46mm DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Remote commander RM-95 DY9-1349-000 Service mode,
electrical adjustment
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-2
2. Setting
(1) Adjustments other than DMC-2: Perform adjustments in the product state.
(2) Tracking adjustment (DMC-2) and Envelope check: Perform them with the Setting A.
(3) Adjustments related to DMC-2 other than Tracking adjustment, tape path system check and tape path system cleaning
: Perform them with the Setting B.
2-1 Setting A
Envelope check)
(1) Remove the six screws (a × 6) and remove the BOTTOM COVER.
(2) Connect the extension cable (DY9-1375-000) to CN3201.
(3) Observe the PB-RF waveform that is output from the extension cable.
Tracking adjustment)
(1) Remove the two MASK POSTS.
(2) Insert the ADJUSTMENT SCREWDRIVER through adjustment hole and adjust height of the posts.
Note: When the tracking adjustment is going to be performed, refer to Chapter 2-6 on page 4-54: Tape Path Adjustment.
Fig. 3-1
ADJUSTMENT SCREWDRIVER
BOTTOM COVER
MASK POST
a × 6
3 1
CN3201
1pin : PB-RF
2pin : GND
3pin : SW PULSE
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-3
Fig. 3-2
2-2 Setting B
(1) Remove the BOTTOM COVER and LEFT COVER UNIT referring to Chapter 4-1: Disassembling and Reassembling.
Note 1: Keep the cable remain connected and set the equipment as shown in Fig. 3-2.
Note 2: Observe the PB-RF signal in the same manners as in the setting A.
to MONITOR TV
to CA-920
to LANC REMOTE COMMANDER
LEFT COVER UNIT
DMC2 RECORDER UNIT
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-4
3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000)
(1) Connect the LANC terminal.
(2) To set up the service mode, turn the “HOLD SW” to the
HOLD position. When the “HOLD SW” is returned to
its home position, the product is controlled using its own
functions.
(3) LCD indications in the service mode:
4 PAGE is indicated while the FOCUS KEY is held
down.
5 BANK is indicated.
6 MODE is indicated.
WR when the BATT mark is presented.
7 ADDR is indicated.
8 DT is indicated (hexadecimal).
(4) The following table shows the key functions available in
the service mode. Fig. 3-3
1. HOLD SW
2. PAGE +
3. BANK + 4. BANK -
5. ADDRESS +
6. ADDRESS -
7. DATA +
8. DATA -
9. STORE
11. PAGE
DISPLAY
12. EJECT
10. MODE
SELECT
6
4 5 8 7
*
:
* *
:
* *
<Key Function in Service Mode>
No. Key name (in service mode) Function Key name (in normal operation)
1 HOLD Transition to service mode by setting to the HOLD
HOLD position
2 PAGE+ PAGE is incremented by one. START/STOP
3 BANK+ BANK is incremented by one. EDIT SEARCH+
4 BANK- BANK is decremented by one. EDIT SEARCH-
5 ADDRESS+ ADDRESS is incremented by one. FF
6 ADDRESS- ADDRESS is decremented by one. REW
7 DATA+ DATA is incremented by one. PLAY
8 DATA- DATA is decremented by one. STOP
9 STORE Confirmation/writing of DATA. PAUSE
10 MODE SELECT RD/WR mode selection. REC REVIEW
11 PAGE DISPLAY PAGE is indicated on LCD of remote controller. FOCUS
12 EJECT EJECT operation is performed. COUNTER RESET
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-5
4. Service Modes
4-1 General
(1) The service modes are of a command input type using LANC communication.
(2) In the command-input-type service mode, operation mode transition in the main unit can be performed using the keys
equipped on it. Also, by returning the HOLD SW to the normal mode position, the operation mode transition on the
main unit can be pefrormed with the service remote controller.
(3) In the command-input-type service mode, the mechanism error, dew, insufficiency of power and other safety detect-
ing functions are ineffective.
(4) In the command-input-type service mode, the LCD mirror function is ineffective.
4-2 Service Mode Indications
Shown below are the on-screen indications to be given in the service modes.
1 Indicates that the service mode is set up (“SERV”).
2 Indicates which block is subjected to the command (“FR”, “CAM”, “MODE” etc.).
3 Indicates a message for a special command (“DATA”, “SUB” etc.).
4 PG : Indicates the PAGE being selected (“4” to “7”).
5 BK : Indicates the BANK being selected (“0” to “7”).
6 MD : Indicates the MODE being selected (RD/WR).
7 ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS being selected in hexadecimal (**00 to **FF, 0000 to FFFF).
8 DT : Indicates the DATA being read or set in hexadecimal (00 to FF).
9 DT : Indicates the DATA being read or set in binary (********), except for some special functions.
] ST : Indicates the STATUS in progress (“OK”, “NG”, “BUSY” etc.).
] Indicates an absolute track number.
] E0 : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH0 (low channel) head.
] E1 : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH1 (high channel) head.
] Indicates a version number of the FR microcomputer.
] Indicates a version number of the MODE microcomputer.
] Indicates a version number of the CAMERA microcomputer.
] Indicates the state of the mechanism. (“POPUP”, “STBY”, “LOAD1”, “LOAD2”, “STOP”, “PLAY”)
] Indicates a firmware version for MMC control. (MC model only)
Fig. 3-4
0 0 : : : 0 0 0 0 0
CD
O
MA
MD
CA
(
( (
)
(
(
)
(
(
( ( ( ( ( (
)
)
) )
)
) ) ) ) ) )
P
P
G BK MD ADDR DT S
SERV
T
ST
1
2 3
4 5 6 7 8
9
10
11
( ) 17
( ) 18
14
15
16
E E1 0
( ) ( ) 12 13
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-6
5. Description of Service Modes
5-1 Error Rate
<Generals>
(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO+AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked.
(2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head
output, failure in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.
<How to read the VIDEO error rate>
An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO + VIDEO sector is
indicated in exponential representation.
Example) “25” is indicated:
Error rate = 2 × 10
-5
<How to read the AUDIO error rate>
To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in
the table below.
The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync
blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits.
(FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.)
Example) “23” is indicated:
Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35
Important
After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.)
Fig. 3-5
Fig. 3-6
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
ERROR RATE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 6 4 WR --1D 00 Product setting.
2) Set DT to 03. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 03 Audio error rate indication.
Reference) Product setting can be selected by resetting DT to 00. Thus, the Audio+Video error rate is indicated.
Low ch. High ch.
EO 1 5 E1
2 × 10
- 5
Low ch. High ch.
(hexadecimal)
(decimal)
AO 2 3 A1
2
( 2 ×16) + 3 = 35
3
In the product specifications, the error rate on both chan-
nels in self -recording LP playback is as follows :
Error rate =28H or less
(Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-7
5-2 Mechanical Error Indications
<Generals>
(1) When the camcorder is stopped upon detection of a mechanical error, the POWER LED indicator blinks and the
message “EJECT CASSETTE” appears on screen. At this step, the error condition can be checked in the service mode.
(2) A mechanical error indication is given in either one of the following two manners: indication of data held only by the
main battery, and indication of data backed up by the Lithium 3V. Referring to the table shown below, select an
indication mode.
(3) Data backed up by the Lithium 3V can be reset at step 3.
<Indication of error data held only by the main battery>
Fig. 3-7
<Indication of error data backed up by Lithium 3V>
Fig. 3-8
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
MECH. ERROR PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --01 -- Error data held only in the POWER-ON state is
indicated.
2 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --02 -- Error data backed up by the EEPROM is
indicated.
3 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 WR --02 00
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Completion of backup data resetting.
: T APE END
: T APE T OP
: DRUM ERROR
: CAPST AN ERROR
: S- REEL ERROR
: T - REEL ERROR
: L OADI NG MT R ERROR
: DEW ERROR
PG BK MD
7 2 RD
ADDR
- - 0 1
D
C D
-
T
-
S
ST
EB TL D
E
B
D
D
C
S
T
L
Rel evant er r or i ndi cat i on i s hi ghl i ght ed.
: DRUM ERROR
: CAPST AN ERROR
: S- REEL ERROR
: T - REEL ERROR
: L OADI NG MT R ERROR
: DEW ERROR
PG BK MD
7 2 RD
ADDR
- - 0 2
D
C D
-
T
-
S
ST
TL D
D
D
C
S
T
L
Rel evant er r or i ndi cat i on i s hi ghl i ght ed.
* *
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-8
5-3 Cleaning mode
When you use the hard-type cleaning tape (DY9-1359-000), set the cleaning mode as described below.
Note: After cleaning is completed, be sure to return the settings to the original ones.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
MECH. ERROR PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 High address setting.
1-1 1) Make setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 01
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Completion of high address “01” setting.
2 Cleaning mode setting
2-1 1) Make setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0111 --
2) Increase the DT value by 1. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑
(Change the right-most digit of the binary
display data from 0 to 1.) ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Completion of cleaning mode setting.
3) Press the STORE key.
3 Return the setting to the original one when
cleaning is completed.
3-1 1) Make setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0111 --
2) Decrease the DT value by 1. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑
(Change the right-most digit of the binary
display data from 1 to 0.) ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Exiting the cleaning mode setting.
3) Press the STORE key.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-9
Completion of high address “33” setting.
WB is set.
WB is locked.
WB high-speed setting mode.
Outdoor white balance mode.
Indoor white balance mode.
The iris is opened forcibly.
The iris is closed forcibly.
A value of AGC gain is maximized.
A value of AGC gain is minimized.
Output the color bar signal of the DSP output.
Output the color bar signal of the IF IC output.
Output a white 100% signal of the DSP output.
Output a white 50% signal of the DSP output.
DSP output, White.
(By charging the DT of “PG: 5, BK: 0, AD:
IC54” in the range of 00 to 7F, the brightness
can be changed arbitrary).
Whenever the STORE key is pressed, the strobe
emits light.
Whenever the STORE key is pressed, the CCD
pixel defect compensation turns ON and OFF.
(DT: 01 → ON, DT: 00 →OFF)
Whenever the STORE key is pressed, the ND
filter turns ON and OFF. (DT: 20 → ON, DT: 00
→ OFF)
5-4 Camera Special Commands
<Generals>
(1) The camera special commands are available for operation check.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, make preparation, and then use any camera special commands as required.
(3) All the settings are reset when the STORE key is pressed in the “WR” mode at a relevant item.
Also, all commands are reset by turning the power off and on again.
5 3 WR **00 33 WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK
5 2 WR 3300 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 3301 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 3302 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 3303 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 3304 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 3305 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 3306 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 3307 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 3308 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 3309 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 330A -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 330B -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 330C -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 330D -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 330E -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
5 2 WR 330F -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
1) Make setting shown at right.
2) Press the STORE key.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
CAM SPECIAL COMMAND PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
Preparation
WB SET
WB LOCK
WB TURBO
WB
OUTDOOR
WB
INDOOR
IRIS OPEN
IRIS CLOSE
AGC MAX
AGC MIN
Color bar
(DSP)
Color bar
(IF IC)
White 100%
(DSP)
White 50%
(DSP)
White,
arbitrary
(DSP)
Strobe
CCD pixel
defect
compensation
ON/OFF
ND ON/OFF 5 2 WR 3310 -- WAIT
↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-10
5-5 Checking The Lens Resetting
<Generals>
(1) Setting the address according to the table below allows to check whether the lens resetting is ended or not.
(2) The 1st digit of binary number indication (Fig.3-4 9) of data is for zoom, and the 2nd for focus resetting. Resetting is
ended if 1 is indicated.
5-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches
<Generals>
(1) In the service mode, the terminals of the MODE microcomputer can be checked. Thereby, it is allowed to check key-
related operations and key-microcomputer connections in the product state.
(2) The addresses of the microcomputer terminals for checking are indicated in the “Remarks” column in the I/O port
table (p.2-14 to p.2-23). Note that since serial communication data signals are not synchronous with the LANC com-
munication cycle (field) in the service mode, operations related to these signals are not indicated accurately. So, use
indications for these signals just as reference data.
(3) The following explanations are provided for the data content which seem rather complicated. For other than below,
use the addresses shown in the “Remarks” column of the I/O port table.
(4) When carrying out functional checks, select the RD mode.
5-6-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key
(1) On the MODE microcomputers, the terminals shown in Fig. 3-10 are A/D input ports. Key and/or mode is detected by
means of the A/D-converted voltage.
Fig. 3-9
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
LENS RESET PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
Preparation 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 1C WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Completion of high address “1C” setting.
LENS RESET Set to status shown on right and check 5 0 RD 1C78 -- WAIT
the binary number indication data.
MI-COM Pin No. NAME PG BK ADDR A/D DATA (00 to FF)
MODE 16 KEY A/D 0 7 2 C7 DE ON CUSTOM REC (+)
MODE 17 KEY A/D 1 7 2 C8 (00 to 2C) (2D to 67) (68 to A7) (A8 to FF)
DE SELECT CUSTOM PRESET DISPLAY REC (–)
MODE 19 KEY A/D 2 7 2 C9 MENU SELECT
MODE 20 KEY A/D 3 7 2 CA STOP PB/STILL FF
MODE 22 KEY A/D 4 7 2 CC EXECUTE
-- -- --
(DIAL)
MODE 5 A/D V 7 2 C2 Lithium battery voltage value
MODE 4 BATT. INFO A/D 7 2 C1 (00 to 33) (34 to FF)
Without battery Battery installation
MODE 3 BATT. A/D 7 3 C0 Voltage of main power supply
The parenthesized values indicate theoretical values, from which actual values may deviate to some extent.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-11
6. Service Hints
6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards
The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.
Fig. 3-10
ZOOM KEY ASS'Y
TRIGGER FPC ASS'Y
R-KEY PCB ASS'Y
CVF PCB ASS'Y
C-KEY2 PCB ASS'Y
C-KEY1 PCB ASS'Y
GY PCB ASS'Y
LENS PCB ASS'Y
CA PCB ASS'Y
MAIN PCB ASS'Y
MJ PCB ASS'Y
C-KEY3 PCB ASS'Y
CARD PCB ASS'Y
C-DIAL PCB ASS'Y
LCD PCB ASS'Y
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-12
6-2 Location of Main Elements
Fig. 3-11
IC1054
CAMERA MI-COM
IC4001
SD I/F
IC4002
FLASH
IC4000
DT4
IC1052
EEP ROM
IC1055
RESET
IC1261
AF MI-COM
IC1004
DSP
IC2000
VRP2 IC2301
VIC3
IC1301
I/F
IC3501
SWITCH
IC3201
DC/DC CONVERTER
CONTROL
IC3500
USB CONTROLER
IC2300
FLASH
IC2601
CHARACTER
GENERATOR
MAIN P.C.B.
IC803
SP DRIVER
IC705
MIC AMP
IC802
A/D,D/A
IC1501
EVF DRIVER
IC4003
SDRAM
IC801
AUDIO
INTERFACE
IC1502
SWITCH
IC103
RESET
IC100
E3V REG &
RESET
IC102
LANC
INTERFACE
IC101
EEPROM
IC2100
VIF2
IC104
MODE MI-COM
IC2303
SDRAM
IC1202
D/A CONVERTER
IC1204
MOTOR DRIVER
IC301
MOTOR DRIVE
IC1004
TIMING GENERATOR
IC1001
V DRIVER
IC1003
H DRIVER
IC1005
INVERTER
CA P.C.B.
IC1053
D-FF
IC1054
CDS/AGC/AD
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-13
Fig. 3-12
6-3 Current Consumption Check
The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status.
Measurement condition : Product status, camera auto mode (AF, IS OFF), LCD ON
(Approx. 0.1A each smaller in case of CVF)
Preset voltage : 7.4V
POWER SW MODE Current consumption (A)
CAMERA REC PAUSE 0.7
REC 0.8
VTR STOP 0.45
PLAY 0.55
POWER OFF 1 (mA)
IC902
LCD DRIVE
IC903
DA CONVERTER
IC901
EEPROM
IC4201
DC/DC CONVERTE
CONTROL
LCD P.C.B.
IC1601
P SENSOR GYRO
IC1602
Y SENSOR GYRO
GY P.C.B.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-14
7. Trouble Shooting
To detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.
7-1 Power Supply
<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences.
Main power is connected. → UNREG is supplied to the MAIN P.C.B. → MODE microcomputer starts up. → MODE
microcomputer outputs VCR ON “H” signal, CAM ON “H” singal. → PWM driver starts up and turns on each power
supply. → Establishes communication with the FR microcomputer. → FR microcomputer initializes recorder me-
chanical chassis. → Enters the standby mode upon completion of initialization.
Then the power supply starts up in the following sequence.
Power mode switch is operated. → Upon receipt of command, MODE microcomputer outputs VCR ON “H” signal,
CAM ON “H” signal. → PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. → Each microcomputer (FR, CAM-
ERA) starts up to implement system control.
<Check Points>
1 Key Inputs
Check the key inputs at Power Switch in the SERVICE mode.
2 Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication
If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer
can be indicated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty.
3 Error in Mechanism (P.3-7)
If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected.
At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters “ERROR STOP” state. In this case, check the error data in
the SERVICE mode.
4 VCR ON “H”, CAM ON “H” MODE (control signal from MODE microcomputer) Outputs
Check the output of control signal by the LANC remote controller.
5 Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B.
Check the continuations of fuses FU3201, 3203, 3204, 3205, 3206, 3207 on MAIN P.C.B. If any fuse is faulty, replace
it and check the current consumption.
6 Replace the MAIN P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation.7-2 Camera Picture Faulty
7-2 Camera Picture Faulty
<Hints>
A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below.
CCD → CA P.C.B → MAIN P.C.B. (DSP → DT4 → IF → VIC → VIF) → JACK F.P.C.
<Check Points>
1 Lens Resetting (P.3-10)
If the camera picture is not displayed, check it in the service mode. If NG, check the lens.
2 Blue Back Output
If the blue-back is confirmed, it can be judged that the signal line subsequent to the VIC are normal.
3 Check of the color bar (DSP) and other outputs (P. 3-9)
The color bar (DSP) and other output signals are generated by the DSP on the MAIN P. C. B. In the service mode,
check whether the color bar (DSP) signal is generated normally or not. If its output is normal, the signal line subse-
quent to the DSP would be normal.
4 CCD Output
The CCD output signal is sampled by the CDS/AGC/AD IC. Check this signal condition.
5 Camera Special Command (P.3-9)
Check the operations of White Balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the SERVICE mode.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR • SERVICE HINTS
3-15
7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture
<Hints>
In DV format, the deterioration of picture quality appears on the screen as a block noise. This failure is occurred when the
picture information (in block unit) exceeds a limit of processing performance of error correction and the previous picture
information is used for compensation.
Normally, if an error rate is worsened considerably by the deterioration of tape quality or head output, the symptom
appears.
For this reason, when you check the playback picture, check the error rate.
<Check Points>
¸ Deterioration of Tape Quality
Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit.
¸ Error Rate (P. 3-6)
In the service mode, check an error rate of self-recording/LP playback. The specified allowable error rate is 2 × 10
-5
. In
case of NG, take the following procedure.
(1) Observe a playback envelope. If it is abnormal, carry out tape-path adjustment.
(2) Run a cleaning tape.
Either a normal cleaning tape (commercially available) or a hard cleaning tape (DY9-1359-000) may be used.
[Playback time]
Normal cleaning tape (commercially available) : Follow the instructions indicated for the cleaning tape.
Hard cleaning tape (DY9-1359-000) : After replacement of the drum unit → 25 seconds
For cleaning → 25 seconds
* When you are going to use a cleaning tape of hard type, set the product in the cleaning mode.
(See P.3-8 5-3: Cleaning Mode.)
(3) Check the error rate again.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, clean the tape drive parts (posts, drum) using cleaning paper moistened
with alcohol.
* Take care not to damage the head.
* Do not touch the head with bare hand.
(4) Check the error rate again.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the tape with a new one and check the error rate again. At this
step, use a tape (must be Panasonic LP tape) which has been purchased at a different time. The error rate may
become worse due to inconsistent quality or aging of the tape.
(5) Check the error rate again.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the drum unit.
(6) Check the error rate again.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the mechanical unit.
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-2 Separation of Bottom Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2
1-3 Separation of Left Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-3
1-4 Separation of Top Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-4
1-5 Separation of Handle Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5
1-6 Separation of Rear Cover Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6
1-7 Separation of Right Cover Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-7
1-8 Separation of CVF Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-8
1-9 Removing the GY P.C.B. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-9
1-10 Removing the CA P.C.B. and LENS P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-10
1-11 Separation of Camera Unit and Recorder UNIT-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-11
1-12 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-12
1-13 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-13
1-14 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-14
1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-4 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-15
1-16 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-5 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-16
1-17 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-6 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-17
1-18 Disassembly of Handle Unit-1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-18
1-19 Disassembly of Handle Unit-2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-19
1-20 Disassembly of Handle Unit-3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-20
1-21 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-21
1-22 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-22
1-23 Disassembly of Recorder Unit-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-23
1-24 Disassembly of Recorder Unit-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-24
1-25 Disassembly of Camera Unit-1---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-25
1-26 Disassembly of Camera Unit-2---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-26
1-27 Disassembly of Lens Unit-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-27
1-28 Disassembly of Lens Unit-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-28
1-29 Disassembly of Lens Unit-3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-29
1-30 Disassembly of LCD Unit-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30
1-31 Disassembly of LCD Unit-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-31
1-32 Installation Method of LCD-Main FPC------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-32
1-33 Disassembly of CVF Unit-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-33
1-34 Disassembly of CVF Unit-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34
1-35 List of Screws Used----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-35
1-36 List of Disassembly Photos -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-36
2. Adjustment Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-38
2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-38
2-2 AF Section Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-39
2-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-39
2-2-2 Cam correction (AUTO) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-40
2-3 VAP Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-41
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET AUTO Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------- 4-41
2-3-2 PWM-DC AUTO Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-41
2-3-3 GYRO GAIN Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-42
2-3-4 EEPROM Writing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-42
2-4 Camera Section Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-43
2-4-1 IRIS Encoder Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-43
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-44
2-4-3 WB Adjustment (1) Extraction Range AUTO Adjustment --------------------------------------- 4-45
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-45
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (2) Extraction Range AUTO Adjustment --------------------------------------- 4-46
2-4-6 Color R-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode) ------------------------------------------------------------- 4-46
2-4-7 Color Ye-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode) ----------------------------------------------------------- 4-46
2-4-8 Color G-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode) ------------------------------------------------------------ 4-47
2-4-9 Color B-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode) ------------------------------------------------------------- 4-47
2-4-10 EEPROM Writing1------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-47
2-4-11 Color R-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode) ------------------------------------------------------------- 4-48
2-4-12 Color Ye-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode) ----------------------------------------------------------- 4-48
2-4-13 Color G-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode) ------------------------------------------------------------- 4-48
2-4-14 Color B-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode) ------------------------------------------------------------- 4-49
2-4-15 EEPROM Writing2------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-49
2-4-16 ND Color WB Automatic Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------- 4-49
2-4-17 EEPROM Writing3------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-49
2-5 Recorder Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-50
2-5-1 Y LEVEL Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-50
2-5-2 C LEVEL Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-51
2-5-3 AGC Initial Value Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-51
2-5-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-52
2-5-5 SWP AUTO Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-52
2-5-6 C. FG AUTO Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-52
2-6 Tape Path Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-53
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-1
1. Disassembling and Reassembling
Notes :
(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part.
(2) The contact orientation for how the flat cable engages with the counter is specified. Refer to the instructions in the
disassembly procedure diagram and interconnection diagram for the boards.
• Lateral engaging connector
(The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)
# : Contacts are positioned downward. (board side)
* : Contacts are positioned upward.
• Lengthwise engaging connector
(The instructions are given only in the board interconnection diagram.)
Indicated by “→”. Arrowheads indicate contacts, then shafts indicate noncontacts.
(3) To secure screws, apply Three Bond 1401B. (CY9-8012-000)
(4) When UL tape is applied on the original part that is to be replaced, apply the tape after replacement.
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart
(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart.
(2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures.
START
: MAIN FLOW
: SUB FLOW
: MAIN UNIT
1-2 Bottom Cover Unit
1-3 Left Cover Unit
1-4 Top Cover Unit
1-5 Handle Unit
1-6 Rear Cover Unit
1-7 Right Cover Unit
1-8 CVF Unit
1-9 GY P.C.B.
1-10 CA P.C.B., LENS P.C.B.
1-11 Recorder UNIT
1-11 Camera Unit
1-12 MIC VOL FPC Ass'y
1-13 C-KEY3 P.C.B.
1-14 C-KEY2 P.C.B.
1-16 C-KEY1 P.C.B.
1-15 LCD Unit
1-17 Right Cover Ass'y
1-18 Handle Cover (B)
1-21 Cassette Cover 1-22 Cassette Arm Ass'y
1-19 R-KEY P.C.B.
1-20 R-KEY Cover
1-23 MJ P.C.B.
1-23 MAIN P.C.B. 1-24 DMC2 Recorder Unit
1-25 3P Prism Ass'y
1-26 Lens Unit
1-27 VAP Unit
1-27 Zoom Lens Ass'y 1-28 Focus Motor, Zoom Motor
1-31 Hinge Ass'y
1-31 LCD-Main FPC
1-32 Installation Method of
LCD-Main FPC
1-29 CS P.C.B.
1-30 LCD P.C.B.
1-33 EVF Hinge Ass'y
1-34 CVF P.C.B.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-2
Fig. 4-1
3mm
a
Black
M1.7
Bottom Cover Unit
(1) -
a
(1)
1-2 Separation of Bottom Cover Unit
(1) Remove the six screws (a × 6) and remove the Bottom Cover Unit.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-3
Fig. 4-2
3mm
a
Black
M1.7
6mm
b
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
6mm
c
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Cassette Cover
MIC Jack Cover
Left Cover Unit
Jack Cover
(1) - a
(1) - c
A
(1) - b
(1) - a
(1) - b
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
CN103
1-3 Separation of Left Cover Unit
(Note) Be careful not to give any shock to the part A of the DMC2 Recorder Unit.
(1) Open the Cassette Cover, MIC Jack Cover and Jack Cover. Then remove the seven screws (a × 2, b × 4, c × 1).
(2) Disconnect the connector CN103. Remove the Left Cover Unit and Jack Cover.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-4
Fig. 4-3
6mm
c d
4mm
(2) Claws
Top Cover Unit
(2)
(1)
(1) - d
OFF
PLAY (VCR) CAMERA
(1) - c
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Camera/Recorder Switch
Note on Reassembling
1-4 Separation of Top Cover Unit
(1) Open the LCD Unit and remove the four screws (c × 2, d × 2).
(2) Remove the three claws and remove the Top Cover Unit.
<Note on Reassembling>
When reassembling the Top Cover Unit, set the Camera/Recorder Switch to OFF.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-5
Fig. 4-4
6mm
b d u
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Black
M1.7
6mm
(1) - u
(1) - b
(1) - d
(1) - d
(2)
(2)
CN703
#
CN102
Handle Unit
CVF Unit
1-5 Separation of Handle Unit
(1) Slide the CVF Unit in the direction of the arrow and remove the six screws (b × 3, d × 2, u × 1).
(2) Disconnect the connectors CN102 and CN703, and remove the Handle Unit.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-6
Fig. 4-5
3mm
a
Black
M1.7
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
(1) - d
(1) - a
(1)
(2)
(2)
CN3201
Rear Cover Unit
1-6 Separation of Rear Cover Unit
(1) Raise the finder in the direction of the arrow and remove the five screws (a × 1, d × 4).
(2) Disconnect the connector CN3201 and remove the Rear Cover Unit.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-7
Fig. 4-6
6mm
c
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Metal
M1.7
e
3mm
(2) - e
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(3) - c
UL Tape
(3)
(3)
CN101
Ferrite Core
Ferrite Core
CN402
*
CN400
*
CN801
#
UL Tape (35mm × 12mm)
Right Cover Unit
Bottom view
Note on Reassembling
1-7 Separation of Right Cover Unit
(1) Peel off the UL Tape and disconnect the connectors CN801, CN101, CN400 and CN402. Then remove the two Ferrite
Cores.
(2) Remove the three screws (e × 3).
(3) Open the LCD Unit and remove the two screws (c × 2). Then remove the Right Cover Unit.
<Note on Reassembling>
Move the two Ferrite Cores more in the direction of the arrow and secure them with the UL Tape (35mm × 12mm) as
shown.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-8
Fig. 4-7
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
(1) -
d
(1)
(2)
(1) -
d
CVF Unit
CN1501
#
1-8 Separation of CVF Unit
(1) Disconnect the connector CN1501 and remove the four screws (d × 4).
(2) Remove the CVF Unit.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-9
Fig. 4-8
Metal
M1.7
e
3mm
(Note)
GY P.C.B.
CCD Radiator 2
Protrusion
Positioning hole
CCD
Radiator 2
(1) - d
(1)
(2)
(2) - e
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Note on Reassembling
1-9 Removing the GY P.C.B.
(1) Remove the three screws (d × 3) and remove the GY P.C.B.
(Note) Do not give any shock to the GY P.C.B. because the GYRO sensors are mounted.
(2) Remove the screw (e × 1) and remove the CCD Radiator 2.
<Note on Reassembling>
When installing the CCD Radiator 2, align the positioning hole with the protrusion as shown.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-10
Fig. 4-9
1-10 Removing the CA P.C.B. and LENS P.C.B.
(1) Peel off the Ferrite Core Cushion.
(2) Remove the screw (f × 1) and remove soldering. Remove the CA Earth Plate.
(3) Remove the screw (f × 1) and disconnect the connectors CN1001 and CN1051. Then remove the CA P.C.B.
(4) Remove the screw (f × 1) and disconnect the connectors CN101, CN102 and CN103. Then remove the LENS P.C.B.
Metal
M1.7
f
3mm
(3) -
f
CA P.C.B.
LENS P.C.B.
(2) Soldering
(4) -
f
(2) -
f
(2)
CN1001
CN1051
Ferrite Core Cusion
(4)
(4)
(4)
(3)
(3)
(1)
CA Earth Plate
CN103
CN101
#
CN102
#
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-11
Fig. 4-10
1-11 Separation of Camera Unit and Recorder UNIT
(1) Remove the five screws (e × 1, d × 4) and separate the Recorder Unit from the Camera Unit.
(Note) Be careful not to drop the Camehol Earth Plate.
(2) Disconnect the connector CN104 and remove the Card Main FPC Ass’y.
Metal
M1.7
e
3mm
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Card Main
FPC Ass'y
(1)
(2)
(1) -
e
(1) -
d
Camehol Earth Plate
(Be careful not to drop.)
Camera Unit
Recorder Unit
CN104
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-12
Fig. 4-11
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
(2) -
d
(2) (2)
(3)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
MIC VOL Dial
CN5
*
CN3
*
CN8
*
CN4
*
CN6
MIC VOL FPC Ass'y
MIC VOL Knob1
MIC VOL Knob2
MIC VOL Knob1
(Be careful not to drop.)
MIC VOL Knob2
(Be careful not to drop.)
Note on Reassembling
1-12 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-1
(1) Disconnect the connectors CN3, CN4, CN5, CN6 and CN8.
(2) Remove the two screws (d × 2). Peel off the double-sided adhesive tape that attaches MIC VOL FPC Ass’y to the
C-KEY2 P.C.B. Then remove the MIC VOL FPC Ass’y, MIC VOL Knob1 and MIC VOL Knob2.
(3) Remove the MIC VOL Dial from the MIC VOL FPC Ass’y.
(Note) Be careful not to drop the MIC VOL Knob1 and MIC VOL Knob2.
<Note on Reassembling>
When reassembling the MIC VOL Knob1 and MIC VOL Knob2, rotate them to their very ends in clockwise. Then set the
MIC VOL Knob1 and MIC VOL Knob2 so that their arrows are directed to the left.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-13
Fig. 4-12
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
C-KEY3 P.C.B.
6P FPC
SD Cover
SD Block
Magnet
Card
SD Shaft
SD Holder
SD Cover2
SD Spring
Be careful
not to drop.
SD Cover
Magnet
Plate
CARD P.C.B.
Audio Knob
Be careful
not to drop.
Mode Knob
Be careful
not to drop.
REC-Serch FPC Ass'y
(1) -
d
(4) - d
(4)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(2) -
d
(3) -
d
(3)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
1-13 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-2
(1) Remove the screw (d × 1) and remove the REC-Search FPC Ass’y.
(2) Remove the two screws (d × 2) and remove the C-KEY3 P.C.B., Audio Knob, Mode Knob and 6P FPC.
(Note) Be careful not to drop the Audio Knob and Mode Knob.
(3) Remove the two screws (d × 2). Then open the SD Cover and remove the SD Block.
(4) Remove the two screws (d × 2). Then remove the CARD P.C.B., Magnet Plate and Magnet Card.
(5) Pull out the SD Shaft and remove the SD Spring, SD Cover, SD Cover 2 and SD Holder.
(Note) Be careful not to drop the SD Spring.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-14
Fig. 4-13
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
(1)
(1)
(1) -
d
(2) -
d
(2)
(3)
(3) Claws
C-KEY2 P.C.B.
LCD-Main FPC
Projections
Route and connect the harnesses
Black
White
Gray
Red
Speaker Holder
Speaker Ass'y
CN2
#
The position of the connector
Attach the UL
Tape so that it
is aligned with
the center of
the PC.B.
C
D
B
A
UL Tape (9mm × 25mm)
UL Tape (9mm × 25mm)
Notes on Reassembling (1)
Note on Reassembling (2)
1-14 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-3
(1) Remove the six screws (d × 6) and disconnect the connector CN2. Then remove the C-KEY2 P.C.B.
(2) Remove the two screws (d × 2) and remove the Speaker Holder.
(3) Remove the two claws and remove the Speaker Ass’y.
<Notes on Reassembling>
(1) Route and connect the harnesses, and attach the UL Tape (9mm × 25mm) as shown. Then align the direction of the
speaker installation.
•Using the line (A) as a guideline and do not touch the hole (B). (Confirm that the plate fixing the P.C.B. is protected.)
•The wires should not override on a rib (C) and do not insert them between the C-KEY2 P.C.B. and the rib.
•Confirm that the connector is in the position shown in the figure (near the center of the speaker) after attachment of the
UL Tape.
•Be careful that the UL Tape will not be attached below the line of (D).
(2) Align the two holes of LCD Main FPC with two projections of Lid Cover Ass’y.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-15
Fig. 4-14
g
5mm
Metal
M1.7
e
3mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
(1) -
e
(2) -
g
(1)
(2)
(3)
LCD Unit
Lid Cover Ass'y
1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-4
(1) Remove the two screws (e × 2) and remove the Lid Cover Ass’y.
(2) Open the LCD Unit as shown and remove the two screws (g × 2).
(3) Remove the LCD Unit in the direction of the arrow.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-16
Fig. 4-15
h
Black
M1.7
5.5mm
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
C-KEY1 P.C.B.
C-DIAL P.C.B.
C-DIAL Holder
Vap Lock Lever
LCD Earth Plate
(1) -
d
(2) -
d
(3) -
h
(4) -
d
(3)
(4)
(4)
(1)
(2)
1-16 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-5
(1) Remove the screw (d × 1), and remove the C-DIAL P.C.B. and C-DIAL Holder together.
(2) Remove the screw (d × 1) and separate the C-DIAL Holder from the C-DIAL P.C.B.
(3) Remove the two screws (h × 2) and remove the Vap Lock Lever.
(4) Remove the five screws (d × 5), and remove the C-KEY1 P.C.B. and LCD Earth Plate.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-17
Fig. 4-16
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Zebra Rubber
Zebra Rubber
C-KEY Knob
LCD Level Cushion
LCD Level Cushion
Audio LCD Ass'y
Level Meter Window
Right Cover2
Right Cover Ass'y
Level Meter Frame
Level Meter Cover
(1) - d
(1) (1)
(1)
(2)
(2) Claws
(2) Claws
(2) Claws
Note on Reassembling
1-17 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit-6
(1) Remove the two screws (d × 2) and remove the Zebra Rubber, C-KEY Knob, LCD Level Cushion, Audio LCD Ass’y,
Level Meter Window, Level Meter Frame and Level Meter Cover.
(2) Remove the nine screws and separate the Right Cover 2 from the Right Cover Ass’y.
<Note on Reassembling>
Attach the Zebra Rubber and LCD Level Cushion as shown.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-18
Fig. 4-17
Note on Reassembling (1)
Note on Reassembling (2)
6mm
b
d
4mm
3mm
a
Black
M1.7
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
(2) - a
(2)
(4) - b
(4) - a
(4) - d
(1)
(4) - b
(2) - d
(3) - d
(3)
(4)
Handle Cover (B)
Slots
Plate (BL) Spring
AC Shoe
GND2 Plate
AC Shoe GND2 Plate
MJ-R-KEY FPC
R-KEY FPC Guard
R-KEY FPC Guard
R-KEY Main FPC Ass'y
Tweezers
1-18 Disassembly of Handle Unit-1
(1) While raising the Plate (BL) Spring with the tweezers etc. as shown, slide it and remove it.
(2) Remove the two screws (a × 1, d × 1) and remove the AC Shoe GND2 Plate.
(3) Remove the two screws (d × 2) and remove the R-KEY FPC Guard.
(4) Remove the seven screws (a × 2, b × 4, d × 1) and remove the Handle Cover (B).
<Notes on Reassembling>
(1) After bending the MJ-R-KEY FPC as shown, install the AC Shoe GND2 Plate.
(2) When installing the R-KEY FPC Guard, bring near the R-KEY Main FPC Ass’y as shown and fix the R-KEY FPC
Guard by letting it pass through the two slots.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-19
Fig. 4-18
6mm
b
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Black
M1.7
j
Black
M1.7
4mm
i
2mm
(3) - i
(4) - j
(4) - j
(1) - b
(1)
(5)
(1)
(2)
RT FPC Ass'y
RT FPC Separator
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1) (2) - d
Accessory Shoe
Accessory Shoe
Base
Shoe Connector
Ass'y
AC Shoe Base
Plate
Shoe FPC Ass'y
Microphone Ass'y
Microphone Ass'y
R-KEY P.C.B.
CN102
CN103
#
CN104
#
1-19 Disassembly of Handle Unit-2
(1) Remove the two screws (b × 2) and disconnect the connectors CN102 and CN104. Then remove the Microphone
Ass’y.
(2) Remove the two screws (d × 2) and disconnect the connector CN103. Then remove the R-KEY P.C.B.
(3) Remove the four screws (i × 4) and remove the Accessory Shoe.
(4) Remove the three screws (j × 3) and remove the four solderings. Then remove the Accessory Shoe Base, Shoe
Connector Ass’y, AC Shoe Base Plate and Shoe FPC Ass’y.
(5) Peel off the RT FPC Separator from the RT FPC Ass’y.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-20
Fig. 4-19
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
(1) - d
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2) - d
(2) - d
(3) - d
(3)
R-KEY Cover
R-KEY Cover Arm
R-KEY Plate
R-KEY Spring
1-20 Disassembly of Handle Unit-3
(1) Remove the two screws (d × 2) and remove the R-KEY Plate. Then remove the R-KEY Cover and R-KEY Cover Arm
together.
(2) Remove the two screws (d × 2) and separate the R-KEY Cover Arm from the R-KEY Cover.
(3) Remove the screw (d × 1) and remove the R-KEY Spring.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-21
Metal
M1.7
e
3mm 3mm
a
Black
M1.7
(2) - a
(2) - a
(4) - e
(4)
(2)
Left Cover Unit
Cassette Arm Ass'y
Grip Open Key
Cassette Cover
Cassette Cover
Hand Strap
(A)
(B)
(1)
(3)
Note on Reassembling
Fig. 4-20
1-21 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit-1
(1) Remove the Hand Strap from the Left Cover Unit.
(2) Open the Cassette Cover and remove the two screws (a × 2).
(3) Remove the Cassette Cover in the direction of the arrow.
(4) Remove the screw (e × 1) and remove the Grip Open Key.
<Note on Reassembling>
When reassembling the Cassette Cover, be sure that the Grip Open Key is attached to Cassette Arm Ass’y. Then attach the
claws of Cassette Arm Ass’y in the order of (A) then (B).
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-22
Fig. 4-21
TAPE
d
4mm
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
(1) -
d
(1) -
d
Cassette Arm Ass'y
Cassette Arm Ass'y
Standby Lever
Mode Key
LOCK STANDBY
CARD
PHOTO
(3)
(2)
Note on Reassembling
1-22 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit-2
(1) Remove the five screws (d × 5).
(2) Close the Cassette Arm Ass’y halfway.
(3) Remove the Cassette Arm Ass’y in the direction of the arrow.
<Note on Reassembling>
Move the Standby Lever to the LOCK position and move the Mode Key to the TAPE position. Then install the Cassette
Arm Ass’y.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-23
Fig. 4-22
Metal
M1.7
e
3mm
(4) Claws
(5)
PM1 Shield Case
HA Shield
Case
PM2 Shield
Case
MJ P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
FPC Spacer
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1) -
e
(3) -
e
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
CN802
#
CN301
#
CN302
#
CN304
#
CN303
#
CN2000
*
CN2901
*
(4)
(4)
Note on Reassembling
(5) Claw
1-23 Disassembly of Recorder Unit-1
(1) Remove the three screws (e × 3) and disconnect the connector CN802. Then remove the MJ P.C.B.
(2) Disconnect the connectors CN2000 and CN2901.
(3) Remove the four screws (e × 4) and disconnect the connectors CN301, CN302, CN303 and CN304. Then remove the
MAIN P.C.B.
(4) Remove the three claws. Then remove the PM1 Shield Case and PM2 Shield Case.
(5) Remove the claw and remove the HA Shield Case.
<Note on Reassembling>
Attach the FPC Spacer in the MAIN P.C.B. as shown.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-24
Fig. 4-23
Metal
M1.7
Metal
M1.7
Metal
M1.4
Metal
M1.4
e k
l m
3mm
3.5mm
1.6mm 1.6mm
(1) Note on Reassembling
(Note)
(2) -
e
(6) -
l
(6)
(5) -
l
(5)
(3)
(3) -
k
(1)
(2)
(4) -
m
(4)
JACK FPC Ass'y
CP Cover
Recorder Holder
RH Earth Plate
DMC2 Recorder Unit
(5) Insulation Rubber
(3) Spring Plate
(5) Insulation Rubber
Micon Cover
DMC FPC Ass'y
JACK FPC Ass'y
FPC Spacer
Be sure to place the unit with
the Cassette Compartment
facing downward.
1-24 Disassembly of Recorder Unit-2
(1) Disconnect the DMC FPC Ass’y from the DMC2 Recorder Unit.
(2) Remove the four screws (e × 4) and remove the JACK FPC Ass’y.
(3) Remove the three screws (k × 3) and separate the Recorder Holder from the DMC2 Recorder Unit. Then remove the
Spring Plate.
(Note) When placing the DMC2 Recorder Unit on a worktable with the Recorder Holder removed, be sure
to place it with the Cassette Compartment side facing downward.
(If the gear on the rear of the Main Chassis is located down side, the gear may be damaged.)
(4) Remove the screw (m × 1) and remove the RH Earth Plate.
(5) Remove the screw (l × 1) and remove the CP Cover. Then remove the three Insulation Rubbers.
(6) Remove the screw (l × 1) and remove the Micon Cover.
<Note on Reassembling>
(1) Attach the FPC Spacer in the JACK FPC Ass’y as shown.
(2) When the Insulation Rubber that is supplied as repair part, is going to be used, apply the Hanarl KS-50M (DY9-3047-
000) on the entire surface of the Insulation Rubber.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-25
Fig. 4-24
6mm
b
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
(1) -
b
(1)
3P Prism Ass'y
1-25 Disassembly of Camera Unit-1
(1) Remove the three screws (b × 3) and remove the 3P Prism Ass’y.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-26
Fig. 4-25
d
4mm
6mm
b
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Metal
M1.7
e
3mm
Lens Holder
G Plate
Camera Holder
Nut Plate
Lens Unit
Claws
(1) -
e
(2) -
b
(2) -
d
(3) -
d
(3)
(2) -
d
(4)
(1) -
d
(1)
(2)
1-26 Disassembly of Camera Unit-2
(1) Remove the four screws (d × 2, e × 2) and remove the Lens Holder.
(2) Remove the five screws (b × 1, d × 4) and remove the two claws. Then remove the Lens Unit.
(3) Remove the screw (d × 1) and remove the G Plate.
(4) Remove the Nut Plate from the Camera Holder.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-27
Fig. 4-26
7mm
n
Metal
M2.0
(Self Tap)
Zoom Lens Ass'y
VAP Unit
(1) -
n
(1)
(1) -
n
1-27 Disassembly of Lens Unit-1
(1) Remove the two screws (n × 2) and rotate the Zoom Lens Ass’y in the direction of the arrow a little. Then separate the
Zoom Lens Ass’y from the VAP Unit.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-28
Fig. 4-27
o p q r
4.5mm
8mm
16.5mm
5mm
(4) -
o
(2) -
q
(2) -
p
(2) -
p
(4) -
o
(4) -
o
(3) -
r
(2)
(1) -
o
(4) -
o
(3)
(3) - α
(3) - α
(4) - β
(4) - β (4) - β
(1)
(4)
(4)
(4)
Focus Motor
Zoom
Motor
Washer
Relay Lens Unit
Front Lens Unit
IG/ND Meter
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
1-28 Disassembly of Lens Unit-2
(1) Remove the two screws (o × 2) and remove the Focus Motor from the body tube.
(2) Remove the four screws (p × 2, q × 2) and separate the Front Lens Unit from the Relay Lens Unit.
(3) Remove the screw (r × 1) and remove the solderings (α) of the IG/ND Meter. Then remove the IG/ND Meter.
(4) After removing the screws (o) and the solderings (β) of the parts to exchange, remove the parts.
<Instruction for Supply>
ZOOM/FOCUS Motor Shaft (1) : LOGENEST LAMBDA A-74 (CY9-8102-000)
Guide Bar (2) : GREASE GE-C9 (CY9-8043-000)
Focus Ring (rear side) (3) : GE-C5 (DY9-3043-000)
Focus Ring (front side) (4) : FLOIL 92KB (DY9-8097-000)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-29
Fig. 4-28
7mm
s
6mm
c
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
Metal
M1.7
(Self Tap)
r
5mm
(1) - s
A
(2) - r
(2)
(2) - r
(3) - o
(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)
Focus Ring
Holder
Focus Ring
VAP Lock Shaft
Lens Cover
CS P.C.B.
15P FPC
Protect Cover
Ass'y
(3) - c
(3)
(3)
(4) - r
(4) - r
(4) - r (4)
CN102
*
CN103
*
o
4.5mm
CN101
Coil Spring
Be careful
not to drop.
1-29 Disassembly of Lens Unit-3
(1) Remove the three screws (s × 3) and remove the Focus Ring Holder, Focus Ring and the VAP Lock Shaft.
(2) Remove the two screws (r × 2) and remove the Lens Cover.
(Note) Be careful not to drop the Coil Spring.
(3) Remove the two screws (o × 1, c × 1) and remove the connectors CN101, CN102 and CN103 on the CS P.C.B.
Then remove the CS P.C.B. and 15P FPC.
(4) Remove the three screws (r × 3) and remove the Protect Cover Ass’y.
(The adhesive : DIA BOND is applied to the portion (A).)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-30
Fig. 4-29
d
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
4mm
Metal
M1.7
e
3mm
(1) Claws
(1) Claws
(A) Claws
(1) -
e
(1)
(1) -
e
(2) -
d
(4) -
e
LCD Top Cover
LCD Sheet
LCD Ass'y
LCD Holder
LCD P.C.B.,
LCD Backlight
Ass'y
LCD Backlight
Ass'y
LCD P.C.B.
LCD P.C.B.
LCD Backlight Ass'y
LCD-SW1
FPC
LCD-SW1
FPC
LCD-SW1 FPC
Hole of the LCD-SW1
LCD Bottom Cover
LCD Bottom Cover
LCD Ass'y
Hinge Ass'y
Hinge Ass'y
Protrusion of
the Hinge Ass'y
(4) Solderings
(3)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(4)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(B)
(1)
CN903
#
CN902
#
CN901
*
Note on Reassembling
1-30 Disassembly of LCD Unit-1
(1) Remove the three screws (e × 3) and remove the four claws, and remove the LCD Top Cover in the direction of the
arrow. Then Peel off the LCD Sheet.
(2) Remove the screw (d × 1) and remove the connectors CN902 and CN903. Then remove the LCD P.C.B., LCD
Backlight Ass’y, Hinge Ass’y, LCD Ass’y, LCD Holder and LCD Bottom Cover.
<Note on Reassembling>
When installing the LCD P.C.B. and the LCD Backlight Ass’y, engage the two claws (A) of the LCD Backlight Ass’y into
the two slots on the Hinge Ass’y, and install them in the LCD Bottom Cover. Then insert the LCD-SW1 FPC (B) in the
crevice between the Hinge Ass’y and the LCD Bottom Cover (Then confirm that the protrusion of the Hinge Ass’y and the
hole of the LCD-SW1 FPC are aligned.). And secure the screw (d × 1) of (2).
(3) Remove the connector CN901 and remove the LCD-SW1 FPC.
(4) Remove the screw (e × 1), remove the two solderings and separate the LCD Backlight Ass’y from the LCD P.C.B.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-31
Fig. 4-30
d
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
4mm
Note on Reassembling
Magnet Sheet,
Magnet
Magnet
Silver surface Black surface
Hole
Hinge Ass'y
Hinge Ass'y
Hinge Cover (T)
Hinge Cover (B)
LCD-Main FPC
(1) -
d
(2)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(4)
LCD-Main FPC
Hinge Ass'y
(3) Claws
Do not breake
the claws.
1-31 Disassembly of LCD Unit-2
(1) Remove the two screws (d × 2) and rotate the Hinge Ass’y in the direction of the arrow.
(2) Remove the Magnet Sheet and the Magnet.
(3) Remove the two claws, and remove the Hinge Cover (T) and the Hinge Cover (B).
(4) Rotate the LCD-Main FPC in the direction of the arrow and separate the LCD-Main FPC from the Hinge Ass’y.
<Note on Reassembling>
When installing the magnet, let the black surface of the magnet be directed to the hole of the Hinge Cover. Then install it.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-32
Fig. 4-31
Valley folding
about 25mm
about 20mm
Peak folding
Align the square portions with the adhesive-coated portions
and fold the flexible board by the valley folding.
LCD-Main FPC
Hinge Ass'y
Hinge Ass'y
Hinge Ass'y
Hinge Ass'y
Hinge Ass'y
LCD-Main FPC
LCD-Main FPC
LCD-Main FPC
LCD-Main FPC
Assembling the LCD-Main FPC
(1)
(2) (3) (4)
(Completed assembly)
(Preparation before installation)
1-32 Installation Method of LCD-Main FPC
(1) When installing the LCD-Main FPC, place the Hinge Ass’y in the position as shown in the figure.
(2) Place the LCD-Main FPC on top of the Hinge Ass’y as shown.
(3) Wrap the LCD-Main FPC in the direction of the arrow around the Hinge Ass’y.
(4) Wrap the LCD-Main FPC in the direction of the arrow around the Hinge Ass’y two and half times.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-33
Fig. 4-32
6mm
b
3mm
a
Black
M1.7 Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
d
Black
M1.7
(Self Tap)
4mm
Flexible board of CVF-Main FPC
The JOINTu portion of
the EVF Hinge Ass'y
EVF Hinge Ass'y
EVF Hinge
Ass'y
FPC drop-safe
hooking plate
FPC drop-safe
hooking plate
CVF Top Cover
CVF Top Cover
FPC Guide
Eye Cup
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(2) - a
(4) - d
(4) - b
(6) - d
(6)
(Note)
(5)
CVF-Main
FPC
EVF Hinge
Ass'y
Note on Reassembling (1)
Note on
Reassembling (2)
1-33 Disassembly of CVF Unit-1
(1) Slide the JOINTu portion of the EVF Hinge Ass’y in the direction of the arrow.
(2) Remove the screw (a × 1), remove the P.C.B. block of the CVF-Main FPC and remove the CVF-Main FPC flexible
board from the hole of the EVF Hinge Ass’y.
(3) Raise the JOINTu portion of the EVF Hinge Ass’y and remove the FPC Guide.
(4) Remove the four screws (b × 2, d × 2) and remove the EVF Hinge Ass’y.
(5) Remove the Eye Cup.
(6) Remove the two screws (d × 2) and remove the FPC drop-safe hooking plate from the groove of the CVF Top Cover.
(Note) When removing the FPC drop-safe hooking plate, be careful not to damage the flexible board.
<Notes on Reassembling>
(1) Pass the flexible board of the CVF-Main FPC through the hole of the EVF Hinge Ass’y.
(2) When installing the CVF Top Cover, insert the FPC drop-safe hooking plate into the groove of the CVF Top Cover.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-34
t
3.5mm
Black
M1.7
Note on Reassembling
Knob Cushion
Dioptric Holder
Lens Spacer
Eye Lens
CVF P.C.B.
Glaring surface
Contacting surface
CVF P.C.B.
(3) Claws
CVF Cleaning
Cover
CVF Bottom
Cover
Dioptric ADJ Knob
CVF-Main
FPC
Mask Plate
Mask Plate
EVF LCD
EVF LCD
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(5)
(5)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1) - t
(5) Claws
(5) Claws
(4) Claws
LCD CVF Cusion
LCD CVF Cusion
Backlight
Ass'y (CVF)
Backlight Ass'y (CVF)
CN4102
#
CN4101
#
Inner Lens
Be careful
not to drop.
Eye Piece
Lens Holder
Be careful
not to drop.
Fig. 4-33
1-34 Disassembly of CVF Unit-2
(1) Remove the screw (t×1) and remove the Dioptric ADJ Knob, Knob Cushion and CVF Bottom Cover.
(Note) Be careful not to drop the Inner Lens and Eye Piece Lens Holder.
(2) Remove the Inner Lens and Eye Piece Lens Holder.
(3) Remove the two claws and remove the CVF Cleaning Cover from the CVF Bottom Cover.
(4) Remove the two claws and remove the Diptric Holder. Then remove the Lens Spacer and Eye Lens.
(5) Remove the connectors CN4101 and CN4102. Then remove the four claws, and remove the CVF P.C.B. and
CVF-Main FPC. Then remove the LCD CVF Cushion, EVF LCD and Mask Plate.
(6) Remove the two solderings and separate the Backlight Ass’y from the CVF P.C.B.
<Note on Reassembling>
When reassembling, the contacting surface of the EVF LCD flexible board should face the LCD CVF Cushion side, and
the same time the glaring surface of the LCD CVF Cushion should face the CVF P.C.B. side.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-35
1-35 List of Screws Used
XA1-7170-309 M1.7-3.0mm
XA4-9170-609
M1.7-6.0mm
XA4-9170-409
4mm
6mm
5mm
6mm
3mm
1.6mm
1.6mm
3mm
3mm
M1.7-4.0mm
XA4-9170-607
M1.7-6.0mm
M1.7-3.0mm
M1.7-3.0mm
M1.7-5.0mm
(Black)
(Black)
(Black)
(Black)
(Black)
(Black)
(Black)
XA1-7170-609 M1.7-6.0mm 6mm
M1.7-1.6mm
M1.4-1.6mm
M1.7-2.0mm
XA1-7170-307
XA9-1382-000
XA4-9170-509
XA1-3170-409
XA1-7170-207
XA1-7140-167
XA4-4200-706
YA1-2179-000
XA4-9170-507
XA9-1283-000
XA1-7170-167
XA4-9170-457
XA9-1399-000
M1.7-4mm
M2.0-7.0mm
M1.7-16.5 mm
M1.7-5.0mm
M1.4-3.5mm
M1.7-4.5mm
4.5mm
7mm
7mm XA4-9170-707
M1.7-7.0mm
5mm
M1.7-3.5mm
XA9-1118-000
M1.7-5.5mm
XA4-9170-807
M1.7-8.0mm
8mm
16.5mm
5.5mm
3.5mm
4mm
2mm
3.5mm
Stepped Screw
Stepped Screw
Stepped Screw
Flat Head Screw
Self Tap
Self Tap Self Tap
Self Tap
Self Tap
Self Tap
Self Tap
Self Tap
Self Tap
Self Tap
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
(Metal)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
j
k
l
PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST
S
Y
M
B
O
L
S
Y
M
B
O
L
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-36
1-36 List of Disassembly Photos
Left Cover Unit Left Side
Rear Cover Unit Right Cover Unit
Right Side Camera Recorder Unit (front)
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-37
Camera Recorder Unit (rear) Main P.C.B.
Recorder Unit Lens Unit
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-38
2. Adjustment Procedures
2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement
After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table
shows mini-mum required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have
been replaced or any faulty condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.
K : Adjustment is required
Camera system
Part name
No. Adjustment item
Lens
VAP 3D MAIN CA GY
Adjustment
ASSY PRISM PCB PCB PCB
Setting
2-2. AF Section Adjustment
2-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment K K K Product condition
2-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO) K K K Product condition
2-3. VAP Section Adjustment
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET AUTO Adjustment K K Product condition
2-3-2 PWM-DC AUTO Adjustment K K Product condition
2-3-3 GYRO GAIN Adjustment K K Product condition
2-3-4 EEPROM Writing K K K Product condition
2-4. Camera Section Adjustment
2-4-1 IRIS Encoder and Offset K K K K Product condition
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) K K K K Product condition
2-4-3 WB Adjustment (1) Extraction
K K K K Product condition
Range AUTO Adjustment
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) K K K K Product condition
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (2) Extraction
K K K K Product condition
Range AUTO Adjustment
2-4-6 Color R-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode) K K K K Product condition
2-4-7 Color Ye-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode) K K K K Product condition
2-4-8 Color G-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode) K K K K Product condition
2-4-9 Color B-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode) K K K K Product condition
2-4-10 EEPROM Writing1 K K K K Product condition
2-4-11 Color R-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode) K K K K Product condition
2-4-12 Color Ye-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode) K K K K Product condition
2-4-13 Color G-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode) K K K K Product condition
2-4-14 Color B-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode) K K K K Product condition
2-4-15 EEPROM Writing2 K K K K Product condition
2-4-16 ND Color WB Automatic Adjustment K K K K Product condition
2-4-17 EEPROM Writing3 K K K K Product condition
Recorder System Adjustment
Part name
No. Adjustment item
MAIN
DMC II
Adjustment
PCB
Setting
2-5. Recorder System Adjustment
2-5-1, 2-5-2 Y LEVEL/C LEVEL Adjustment K Product condition
2-5-3 AGC Initial Value Adjustment K Product condition
2-5-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment K Product condition
2-5-5 SWP AUTO Adjustment K K Product condition
2-5-6 C. FG AUTO Adjustment K K Product condition
DMC II
2-6 Tape Path Adjustment Tape Path Adjustment
setting
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-39
2-2 AF Section Adjustment
Note)
(1) The sections 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If
they are performed independently, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.
Also, when section 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO)
must be executed immediately without elapse of time. If execute section 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed
after elapse of time upon completion of section 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment, the sufficient performance cannot be
obtained.
Preparation)
(1) For CZ automatic adjustment/cam correction, set the product condition.
(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Tape/Card : Tape
Program AE : Auto Mode
ZOOM : Telephoto-end (Turn off the electronic zoom)
CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02 m from lens front
Chart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)
2-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment
CHART CZ adjustment chart
SPEC. At STEP 5, DT : AA should be attained.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode.
(3) Perform the cam correction.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
CZ PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 1C WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address “1D” is set up.
2 1) Read out the data, and add 80h 5 0 WR 1C7C WAIT
to the data.
ex) 00 → 80
40 → C0
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Move to adjustment mode.
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 31 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address “31” is set up.
4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3100 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 00-08 BUSY Automatic adjustment is started. Then, it is
completed in 30 seconds approximately. If any NG
condition is encountered in automatic adjustment,
check the parts inside the lens section.
5 Judgment on result of 5 2 RD 3100 AA WAIT Adjustment is completed (result is OK).
adjustment Perform the cam correction.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ FF WAIT Adjustment is completed (result is NG).
Take the procedure again from the beginning.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-40
2-2-2 Cam correction (AUTO)
CHART CZ adjustment chart
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Turn the main power off and on.
(2) Perform the cam correction by following the table below.
(3) Turn off the main power then back on. Check that defocusing does not occur in ordinary zooming operation. (AF ON)
(4) If the result is NG, perform 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO).
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
CAM CORRECTION PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 31 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address “31” is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3101 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK
3 Set the zoom position to the telephotoend.
After the focusing is stopped, turn the AF off.
4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3102 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Perform the automatic correction.
5 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3104 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK EEP write preparetion.
6 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3105 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Completion of writing the correction data.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-41
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
VAP ADJ MODE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 32 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD **00 ↑ OK High address “32” is set up.
2-3 VAP Section Adjustment
Preparation)
(1) VAP adjustment is made at a product status.
(2) Prepare a tripod or stable bench.
<Preparation for IS adjustment>
(1) According to the following table, set the high address of VAP adjustment mode.
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET AUTO Adjustment
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Wait for 30 seconds or more without shaking the camera.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out.
Note : After the STORE key is pressed, it will take approx. 25 seconds at maximum to reach the completion
of adjustment (OK).
2-3-2 PWM-DC AUTO Adjustment
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
GYRO OFFSET AUTO PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 320D 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
PWM-DC PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 320E 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-42
2-3-3 GYRO GAIN Adjustment
SPEC. Data writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, write the data.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
GYRO GAIN PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 Gyro YAW gain adjustment
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3200 B4 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
2 Gyro PITCH gain adjustment
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3201 A3 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjusment is completed.
2-3-4 EEPROM Writing
SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, write the adjustment data (from 2-3-1 through 2-3-2) into EEPROM.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
EEPROM WRITING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 320F 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-43
2-4 Camera Section Adjustment
Note)
(1) Each adjustment data shown below becomes effective after it is written into the respective EEPROMs shown below.
If power must be turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the EEPROM write procedure as men-
tioned in 2-4-6.
(2) The adjustments from 2-4-2 through 2-4-5 must be carried out in series.
Preparation)
(1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition.
(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Program AE : Auto Mode
AF : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
Chart : Standard angle of view (Set the angle after setting the high address.)
<Preparation for adjustment>
(1) Referring to the table shown below, set the high address for camera adjustment mode.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
CAM ADJ MODE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 30 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address “30” is set up.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
IRIS ENC. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3000 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
2-4-1 IRIS Encoder Adjustment
CHART Light box (5600° K), and Gray scale
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris Encoder.
Adjustment item EEPROM writing
2-4-1 to 2-4-9 2-4-10
2-4-11 to 2-4-14 2-4-15
2-4-16 2-4-17
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-44
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + CCA12 filter
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC The vector bright dot shall be at the center. (Fig. 4-34)
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the WB Adjustment (1) manual adjustment by changing data (DT)
at the four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
WB (1) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
R-Gain coarse adj. 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3004 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
R-Gain fine adj. 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3005 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
B-Gain coarse adj. 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3006 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
B-Gain fine adj. 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3007 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
Fig. 4-34
BURST
BRIGHT
SPOT
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-45
2-4-3 WB Adjustment (1) Extraction Range AUTO Adjustment
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + CCA12 filter
SPEC Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table below, carry out the adjustment
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K)
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC The vector bright dot shall be at the center. (Fig. 4-35)
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the WB Adjustment (2) manual adjustment by changing data (DT)
at the four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
WB (1) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3008 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
WB (2) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
R-Gain coarse adj. 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3009 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
R-Gain fine adj. 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 300A “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
B-Gain coarse adj. 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 300B “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
B-Gain fine adj. 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 300C “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
Fig. 4-35
BURST
BRIGHT
SPOT
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-46
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (2) Extraction Range AUTO Adjustment
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K)
SPEC Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table below, carry out the adjustment.
2-4-6 Color R-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + color bar chart
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC GAIN: × 2.5 (with reference to burst), PHASE: 100°
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the color R-Gain manual adjustment by changing data (DT) at the
four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
2-4-7 Color Ye-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + color bar chart
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC GAIN: × 1.5 (with reference to burst), PHASE: 182°
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the color Ye-Gain manual adjustment by changing data (DT) at the
four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
WB (2) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 300D 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Color R-Gain PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 300E “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
PHESE 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 300F “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Color Ye-Gain PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3010 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
PHESE 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3011 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-47
2-4-8 Color G-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + color bar chart
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC GAIN: × 2.0 (with reference to burst), PHASE: 258°
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the color G-Gain manual adjustment by changing data (DT) at the
four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
2-4-9 Color B-Gain Adjustment (Tape Mode)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + color bar chart
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC GAIN: × 1.8 (with reference to burst), PHASE: 325°
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the color B-Gain manual adjustment by changing data (DT) at the
four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Color G-Gain PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3012 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
PHESE 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3013 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Color B-Gain PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3014 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
PHESE 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3015 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
EEPROM WRITING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3016 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
2-4-10 EEPROM Writing1
SPEC Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table below, write adjustment data (2-4-1 to 2-4-9) into the EEPROM.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-48
2-4-11 Color R-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + color bar chart
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC GAIN: × 2.7 (with reference to burst), PHASE: 101°
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the color R-Gain manual adjustment by changing data (DT) at the
four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
2-4-12 Color Ye-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + color bar chart
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC GAIN: × 1.8 (with reference to burst), PHASE: 170°
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the color Ye-Gain manual adjustment by changing data (DT) at the
four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Color R-Gain PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3019 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
PHESE 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 301A “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Color Ye-Gain PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 301B “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
PHESE 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 301C “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Color G-Gain PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 301D “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
PHESE 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 301E “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
2-4-13 Color G-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + color bar chart
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC GAIN: × 2.7 (with reference to burst), PHASE: 254°
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the color G-Gain manual adjustment by changing data (DT) at the
four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-49
2-4-14 Color B-Gain Adjustment (Card Mode)
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K) + color bar chart
M. EQ. Vector scope
TP/TRIG VIDEO OUT
SPEC GAIN: × 2.6 (with reference to burst), PHASE: 310°
Procedure)
(1) While observing the vector scope screen, carry out the color B-Gain manual adjustment by changing data (DT) at the
four addresses (ADDR) in the table below.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Color B-Gain PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 301F “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
PHESE 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3020 “ADJ” WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
EEPROM WRITING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3021 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
2-4-15 EEPROM Writing2
SPEC Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table below, write adjustment data (2-4-11 to 2-4-14) into the EEPROM.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
ND COLOR WB PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3022 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
2-4-16 ND Color WB Automatic Adjustment
CHART LIGHT BOX (5600° K)
SPEC Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table below, perform the adjustment.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
EEPROM WRITING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right and change DT. 5 2 WR 3023 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
2-4-17 EEPROM Writing3
SPEC Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table below, write adjustment data (2-4-16) into the EEPROM.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-50
2-5 Recorder Section Adjustment
Preparation)
(1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state.
2-5-1 Y LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. 990 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Y level
adjustment.
Fig. 4-36
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Y LEVEL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 001E ADJ White raster is output.
2) For adjustment , change data ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ “ADJ” Adjustment is in progress.
properly.
3) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.
990 ± 20mV
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-51
Fig. 4-37
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
C LEVEL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 001F ADJ Green raster is output.
2) For adjustment , change data ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ “ADJ” Adjustment is in progress.
properly.
3) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.
710 ± 20mV
2-5-3 AGC Initial Value Adjustment
SIGNAL COLOR BAR
MODE E-E (ANALOG LINE IN)
SPEC. Automatic write
Procedure)
(1) Input a color bar signal to the analog line circuit from the pattern generator.
(2) Carry out AGC initial value adjustment according to the table shown below.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
AGC INITIAL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **04 FF
2) Press t he STORE Key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.
2-5-2 C LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. 710 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out C level
adjustment.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-52
2-5-5 SWP AUTO Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1347-000)
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
SWP (AUTO) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **01 --
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
C.FG (AUTO) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **03 --
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.
2-5-6 C. FG AUTO Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1347-000)
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
2-5-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment
MODE During camera recording in product condition (AF: OFF, LCD PANEL: ON)
SPEC. Power supply voltage: 5.85 ± 0.02 [V]
Note)
1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start.
Procedure)
(1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.85 ± 0.02 [V].
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
BATTERY VOLTAGE DROP PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 2 WR **FF --
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-53
2-6 Tape Path Adjustment
Note)
(1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC
II Service Manual separately issued.
Preparation)
(1) For tape path adjustment, make the setting B (P.3-3).
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table given below (STEP 1), set up the forced SP mode.
(2) Referring to the table given below (STEPS 2, 3, 4), play back the tracking master (DY9-1345-000) for tape path
adjustment. At STEP 3, perform tracking shift by adjusting DT in a range of 01 to 07 so that the RF envelope will be
70%.
(3) After adjustment, restore the settings of forced SP and tracking shift to the normal conditions of the product state
referring to the table given below (STEP 5).
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
TRACKING TAPE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Set up the forced SP mode.
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 01
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * High address “01” is set up.
1-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0110 1A
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Completion of forced SP mode setting.
2 1) Play back the tracking tape.
3 1) Set up tracking shift.
3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 00
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * High address “00” is set up.
3-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0051 FF
2) Perform 70% tracking shift by ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 00~0F * The amount of tracking shift is changed.
adjusting DT in a range of 00 to
07.
4 1) Perform tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state.
5 1) Restore the settings to the normal conditions of the product state.
5-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0051 FF
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Tracking shift released
5-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 01
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * High address “01” is set up.
5-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0110 18
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Forced SP mode released
DM-XM2 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-54
Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach
the transparent chart on a vectorscope display.
: Movie picture
: Still picture
BURST
B-Y
R-Y
DM-XM2 E
Color balance adjustment chart
PAL
R
R
Ye
Ye
G
G
B
B

CHAPTER 5. PARTS LIST
CONTENTS
EXPLODED VIEWS
Casing Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-2
Left Cover Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-4
Top Cover/Rear Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6
Handle Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-8
CVF Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-10
Right Cover Unit Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-12
LCD Unit Section-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-14
Camera/Recorder Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-16
Lens Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-18
Mechanical Chassis Section-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-20
Mechanical Chassis Section-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-22
Mechanical Chassis Section-3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-24
Mechanical Chassis Section-4 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-26
Accessories Section-1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-28
Accessories Section-2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-30
Accessories Section-3 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-32
Accessories Section-4 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-34
ELECTRICAL PARTS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-36
PARTS LIST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-37
5-1
1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks.
Critical parts are marked with ! in this electrical parts list.
2. The numbers indicated on the connectors do not correspond to the symbol numbers.
Please check the correct symbol numbers of the connectors on the interconnection schematic diagram.
Worded : “CAUTION-FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE FU3204,
FU3205 ONLY SAME TYPE : 49401.5 1.5A-32V FUSE
MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE, REPLACE FU3201 ONLY SAME TYPE : 4941.25 1.25A-32V
FUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTLE FUSE AND REPLACE FU3203, FU3206, FU3207 ONLY SAME
TYPE : 494001 1.0A-32V FUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTLEFUSE FUSE”
CAUTION
DM-XM2 E
5-2
Casing Unit Section
16
1×2
2
2
5
3
1×3
3
3×2
3
4
5
6
8
10
13
11
14 15
12
9
2×6
2×3
2
1×4
5×3
7×3
3×2
1
1
1
TOP COVER UNIT
LEFT COVER UNIT
REAR
COVER
UNIT
CAMERA/
RECORDER/
LENS UNIT
CVF UNIT
HANDLE
UNIT
RIGHT COVER UNIT
DM-XM2 E
5-3
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA4-9170-409 000 F 12 SCREW
2 XA1-7170-309 000 F 12 SCREW
3 XA4-9170-609 000 F 7 SCREW
4 DA2-1989-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK
5 XA4-9170-607 000 F 5 SCREW
6 DG1-4460-000 000 C 1 FPC, ASSY MAIN-CK2
7 XA1-7170-307 000 F 3 SCREW
8 WE8-6025-000 000 C 2 CORE, FERRITE NEW
9 DA2-2044-000 000 C 1 CUSION, FERRITE CORE NEW
10 DA2-1990-000 000 B 1 COVER, BOTTOM NEW
11 DA2-1991-000 000 C 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW
12 DA2-1994-000 000 C 1 LABEL, LI NEW
13 DA2-2039-000 000 C 1 PLATE, RATING NEW
14 D52-0210-000 000 C 1 HOOD, LENS NEW
15 DG1-3740-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS
16 XA1-7170-609 000 F 1 SCREW
DM-XM2 E
5-4
Left Cover Unit Section
1
24
24
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
13
1×4
16 ×2
16×2
16×5
16×2
*
*
* The screw XA4-9170-459 is used when shipped from the factory.
Use the screw of item No. 16 (XA4-9170-409) for servicing.
DM-XM2 E
5-5
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA1-7170-307 000 F 7 SCREW
2 DA2-1887-000 000 C 1 WINDOW, CASSETTE NEW
3 DA2-1873-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE NEW
4 DA2-1888-000 000 B 1 COVER, MIC JACK NEW
5 DA2-1889-000 000 B 1 COVER, LENS L SIDE NEW
6 DA2-1985-000 000 B 1 STRAP ASS’Y, HAND NEW
7 DA2-1872-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW
8 DA2-1895-000 000 B 2 MASK POST NEW
9 DG1-7395-000 000 B 1 ZOOM KEY ASS’Y NEW
10 DA1-9588-000 000 F 1 KEY, GRIP OPEN
11 DA1-9576-000 000 F 1 SPRING, PLATE
12 DA1-9574-000 000 F 1 LEVER, STANDBY
13 DS1-0152-000 000 F 1 SPRING, COIL
14 DA1-9573-000 000 F 1 KEY, TRIGGER
15 DA2-1876-000 000 B 1 SWITCH PHOTO NEW
16 XA4-9170-409 000 F 12 SCREW
17 DA2-1875-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, MODE SWITCH NEW
18 DG1-4455-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, TRIGGER NEW
19 DA2-1890-000 000 C 1 PLATE, C LOCK NEW
20 DF1-1654-000 000 B 1 CASSETTE ARMU ASS’Y NEW
21 DA1-9575-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, TRIGGER KEY
22 DY1-8482-000 000 B 1 KEY, MODE
23 DA2-1881-000 000 C 1 PLATE, NUT NEW
24 XA1-7170-309 000 F 2 SCREW
DM-XM2 E
5-6
Top Cover/Rear Unit Section
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
6×2
6×3
6×2
DM-XM2 E
5-7
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8459-000 000 B 1 COVER, ASS’Y TOP NEW
2 DA2-1902-000 000 B 1 KEY, POWER TOP NEW
3 DA2-1903-000 000 B 1 KNOB, POWER LOCK NEW
4 DS1-5419-000 000 C 1 SPRING, POWER LOCK NEW
5 DA2-1904-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, POWER KEY NEW
6 XA4-9170-409 000 F 7 SCREW
7 DA2-1905-000 000 C 1 SPRING, POWER CLICK NEW
8 DF1-1473-000 000 C 1 CONTACT ASS’Y, BATTERY
9 DA1-9551-000 000 B 1 RUBBER, BOTTOM
10 DY1-8451-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR NEW
11 DS1-0157-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
12 DA2-1988-000 000 B 1 LEVER, BATTERY LOCK NEW
DM-XM2 E
5-8
Handle Unit Section
1
2
3
4
9
5
6
7
3
3
8
10
11
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
(30)
(31)
(33)
(32)
23
(3)
(3)
3
3
3×2
15×4
12×2
12×2
12×2
12
12
3×2
23×2
3×2
(3)×2
(27)×2
27×2
DM-XM2 E
5-9
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8461-000 000 B 1 COVER, HANDLE(T) NEW
2 DA1-9618-000 000 B 1 KNOB, HOLD KEY
3 XA4-9170-409 000 F 15 SCREW
4 DA2-1937-000 000 B 1 COVER, R-KEY NEW
5 DA2-1941-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, HOLD KNOB NEW
6 DA2-2035-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, PHOTO-KEY NEW
7 DF1-1655-000 000 C 1 PLATE, R-KEY NEW
8 DA2-1998-000 000 C 1 SPRING, R-KEY NEW
9 DA2-1942-000 000 C 1 ARM, R-KEY COVER NEW
10 DA2-1999-000 000 C 1 PLATE, AC SHOE GND1 NEW
11 DA2-1945-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, STRAP NEW
12 XA4-9170-609 000 F 8 SCREW
13 CA1-8666-000 000 B 1 BASE, ACCESSORY SHOE NEW
14 DA2-2013-000 000 B 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY NEW
15 XA1-3170-409 000 F 4 SCREW
16 CA1-9328-000 000 B 1 SPRING, PLATE (BL)
17 DG1-7296-000 000 C 1 SHOE CONNECTOR ASS’Y
18 DA2-1944-000 000 C 1 BASE PLATE, AC SHOE NEW
19 DG1-4494-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, SHOE NEW
20 DG1-4438-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, R-KEY NEW
21 DG1-4458-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, RKEY-MAIN NEW
22 DH2-2292-000 000 C 1 FPC, MJ-RKEY NEW
23 XA1-7170-207 000 F 3 SCREW
24 DA2-1936-000 000 B 1 COVER, HANDLE(B) NEW
25 DA2-1897-000 000 C 1 GUARD, RKEY FPC NEW
26 DA2-2000-000 000 C 1 PLATE, AC SHOE GND2 NEW
27 XA1-7170-309 000 F 5 SCREW
28 DA2-2034-000 000 C 1 SEPARATOR, RT-FPC NEW
29 DG1-7423-000 000 C 1 MICROPHONE ASS’Y NEW
30 DA2-1953-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, MIC NEW
31 DG1-4456-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, RT NEW
32 DA1-9558-000 000 B 1 SEAL, MIC
33 DY1-8463-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, MIC NEW
DM-XM2 E
5-10
CVF Unit Section
1×2
23×2
1×2
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
24
21
22
5
*
* These screws are locked by the Neji Lock
(screw locking paint) when shipped from the factory.
Use “5” (XA1-7170-309) for servicing.
DM-XM2 E
5-11
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA4-9170-409 000 F 4 SCREW
2 DG1-7397-000 000 B 1 HINGE ASS’Y, EVF NEW
3 DA2-2006-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, FPC NEW
4 DH2-2293-000 000 B 1 FPC, CVF-MAIN NEW
5 XA1-7170-309 000 F 1 SCREW
6 DG1-4448-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW
7 DG1-4067-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (CVF)
8 DA2-2007-000 000 C 1 CUSION, LCD CVF NEW
9 WG2-5209-000 000 C 1 LCD EVF NEW
10 DA1-9760-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK
11 YN1-1611-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYE
12 DA2-2036-000 000 C 1 SPACER, LENS NEW
13 DA2-1954-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, DIOPTRIC(T) NEW
14 DA2-1956-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW
15 DA2-1959-000 000 B 1 EYE CUP NEW
16 DA2-1958-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, EYE PIECE LENS NEW
17 YN1-1612-000 000 C 1 LENS, INNER
18 DA2-1955-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, DIOPTRIC(B) NEW
19 DA2-1957-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW
20 DA2-1961-000 000 B 1 KNOB, DIOPTRIC ADJ NEW
21 XA9-1399-000 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
22 DA2-1982-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF CLEANING NEW
23 XA4-9170-609 000 F 2 SCREW
24 DA1-9381-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, KNOB
DM-XM2 E
5-12
Right Cover Unit Section
a
a
b
b
1×2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
1×2
1
1×7
1×2
1×5
12×2
22×2
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
33
9×2
41
42
1×2
1×2
1×2
1
1
LCD UNIT
DM-XM2 E
5-13
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA4-9170-409 000 F 27 SCREW
2 DG1-4459-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, MIC VOL NEW
3 DG1-4441-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, C-KEY3 NEW
4 DH2-2298-000 000 C 1 FPC, 6P NEW
5 DY1-8458-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER ASS’Y NEW
6 DA2-1996-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, SPEAKER NEW
7 DG1-4440-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, C-KEY2 NEW
8 DH2-2295-000 000 C 1 FPC, 15P NEW
9 XA9-1118-000 000 F 2 SCREW NEW
10 DA2-1923-000 000 C 1 LEVER, VAP LOCK NEW
11 DG1-4439-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, C-KEY1 NEW
12 XA1-7170-307 000 F 2 SCREW
13 DY1-8456-000 000 B 1 COVER, ASS’Y LID NEW
14 DA2-1977-000 000 B 1 KNOB, MODE NEW
15 DA2-1976-000 000 B 1 KNOB, AUDIO NEW
16 DA2-1972-000 000 B 2 DIAL, MIC VOL NEW
17 DA2-1974-000 000 B 1 KNOB, MIC VOL2 NEW
18 DA2-1973-000 000 B 1 KNOB, MIC VOL1 NEW
19 DY1-8453-000 000 B 1 COVER, ASS’Y RIGHT NEW
20 DG1-4461-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, REC-SERCH NEW
21 DA2-1928-000 000 B 1 COVER, LITHIUM BATT NEW
22 XA4-9170-509 000 F 2 SCREW
23 DA2-1930-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT 2 NEW
24 DA2-1916-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEVEL METER NEW
25 DA2-1917-000 000 B 1 FRAME, LEVEL METER NEW
26 DA2-1918-000 000 B 1 WINDOW, LEVEL METER NEW
27 DA2-1995-000 000 B 1 PLATE, LCD EARTH NEW
28 DG1-4433-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, C-DIAL NEW
29 DA2-1921-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, C-DIAL NEW
30 DH2-2294-000 000 C 1 FPC, 5P NEW
31 DG1-7394-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, AUDIO NEW
32 DA2-1929-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LEVEL LCD NEW
33 DA2-1920-000 000 B 1 RUBBER, ZEBRA NEW
34 DA2-1933-000 000 B 1 COVER, SD2 NEW
35 DS1-5418-000 000 C 1 SPRING, SD NEW
36 DY1-8455-000 000 B 1 COVER, SD NEW
37 DA2-1919-000 000 B 1 KNOB, C-KEY NEW
38 DA2-1931-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, SD NEW
39 DA2-1908-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, SD NEW
40 DA2-1423-000 000 C 1 MAGNET, CARD
41 DA2-1997-000 000 B 1 PLATE MAGNET NEW
42 DG1-4435-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CARD NEW
DM-XM2 E
5-14
LCD Unit Section
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
6
7
7×2
5×2
15
16
DM-XM2 E
5-15
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-1968-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM NEW
2 DA2-1969-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LCD NEW
*1 3 DH9-0831-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
*2 3 DY1-8274-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
4 DG1-7377-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y, LCD
5 XA4-9170-409 000 F 3 SCREW
6 DG1-4436-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD NEW
7 XA1-7170-307 000 F 4 SCREW, MACH. PANHEAD, M1.7X3
8 DF1-1658-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW
9 DA2-1970-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE(T) NEW
10 DH2-2300-000 000 B 1 FPC, LCD-MAIN NEW
11 DG1-7396-000 000 B 1 HINGE ASS’Y NEW
12 DA2-1737-000 000 C 1 MAGNET
13 DA2-1983-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MAGNET NEW
14 DA2-1971-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE(B) NEW
15 DG1-4462-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-SW1 NEW
16 DA2-2058-000 000 C 1 LCD SHEET NEW
*1 : Same quality as the production line.
*2 : Free from the pixel dot.
DM-XM2 E
5-16
Camera/Recorder Unit Section
1
3
37
38
35
36
5
2
4×3
6×4
7
8
9
10
10
11
12
13×3
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
32
33
34
29
10
6×2
6×2
6×3
6
6
4×4
22×3
4×2
4
4×4
4
36
6
32
LENS UNIT
DM-XM2 E
5-17
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA1-7140-167 000 F 1 SCREW
2 DA2-2051-000 000 C 1 PLATE, RH EARTH NEW
3 DY1-8264-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC2
4 XA1-7170-307 000 C 15 SCREW
5 DA2-1899-000 000 C 1 COVER, MICOM NEW
6 XA4-9170-409 000 C 14 SCREW
7 DG1-4434-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MJ NEW
8 DH2-2301-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-MJ NEW
9 DA2-1871-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER NEW
10 DA2-1162-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION
11 DA2-1898-000 000 C 1 COVER, CP NEW
12 DA2-2052-000 000 C 1 SPRING PLATE NEW
13 XA9-1283-000 000 F 3 SCREW
14 DG1-3978-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, DMC
15 DA2-1891-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA NEW
16 DY1-8465-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW
17 DG1-4454-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, JACK NEW
18 DA2-1984-000 000 C 1 CPACER, FPC NEW
19 DA2-1892-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD PM1 NEW
20 DG1-4463-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CARD-MAIN NEW
21 DA2-1893-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD PM2 NEW
22 XA4-9170-609 000 F 4 SCREW
23 DA2-1909-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CAMEHOL EARTH NEW
24 DA2-1881-000 000 C 1 PLATE, NUT NEW
25 DA2-1910-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CAMERA NEW
26 DA2-2046-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CA EARTH NEW
27 DA2-1914-000 000 C 1 PLATE, G NEW
28 DH2-2302-000 000 C 1 FPC, GY-CARD NEW
29 DG1-4444-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, GY NEW
30 DA2-1911-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LENS NEW
31 DG1-4442-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LENS NEW
32 XA9-1382-000 000 F 3 SCREW NEW
33 DG1-4447-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CA NEW
34 DG1-7401-000 000 C 1 3P PRISM ASS’Y NEW
35 DA2-2092-000 000 C 1 SEAL, PUSH
36 XA1-7170-1W7 000 F 2 SCREW NEW
37 DA1-9903-000 000 B 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS
38 DA2-2090-000 000 C 1 SHEET, CASSETTE
DM-XM2 E
5-18
Lens Unit Section
(5)
(23)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(19)
(20)
(25)
(18)
(4)
(3)
1
2
9
6
7
8
4×2
10
24
11
12
13
14
16
(4)×3
(21)×2
(22)×2
(5)×2
(5)×2
(25)×2
(17)×2
15×3
DM-XM2 E
5-19
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 YA1-2845-000 000 B 1 SEAL, NAME RING NEW
2 DY1-8466-000 000 B 1 VAP ASS’Y NEW
3 DY1-8182-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, PROTECT
4 XA4-9170-507 000 F 6 SCREW
5 XA4-9170-457 000 F 8 SCREW
6 YA1-2850-000 000 B 1 COVER, LENS NEW
7 YA1-2161-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
8 YA1-2154-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, VAP LOCK
9 DA1-9557-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, LENS
10 DA1-9556-000 000 B 1 SEAL, 3CCD
11 YA1-2163-000 000 C 2 SPACER, FOCUS RING
12 YA1-2150-000 000 C 1 RING, FOCUS
13 YA1-2155-000 000 B 1 RING, RUBBER FOCUS
14 YA1-2151-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FOCUS RING
15 XA4-9170-707 000 F 3 SCREW
16 DY1-8467-000 000 C 1 ZOOM LENS ASS’Y NEW
17 XA4-4200-706 000 F 2 SCREW
18 YH8-0117-000 000 C 1 IG METER NEW
19 YH7-0176-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, ZOOM
20 YH7-0175-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, FOCUS
21 YA1-2179-000 000 F 2 SCREW
22 XA4-9170-807 000 F 2 SCREW
23 DY1-8468-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, MAIN NEW
24 YH1-0861-000 000 C 1 FPC, 15P NEW
25 XA4-9170-607 000 F 3 SCREW
DM-XM2 E
5-20
Mechanical Chassis Section-1
1
4
(2)
(3)
6
7
10
11
12
5×4
2×3
8
(9)
Slide Chassis
Ass'y
DM-XM2 E
5-21
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DG1-3861-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y
2 DA2-0642-000 000 F 4 SCREW
3 DA1-0740-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y
4 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER
5 DA2-0643-000 000 F 4 SCREW
6 DF1-1514-000 000 C 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y
7 DG1-3857-000 000 C 1 DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y
8 DY1-8283-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y (3CH)
9 DA2-0793-000 000 C 1 PLATE, TAPE GUIDE
10 DY1-8210-000 000 C 1 MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y
11 DA2-0758-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
12 DA2-0757-000 000 F 1 SCREW
DM-XM2 E
5-22
Mechanical Chassis Section-2
(2)
1
(3)
(4)
(8)
(5)×2
(6)
(9)
(13)
(14)
(15)
19
(16)
(11)
(18)
(17)
(10)
(5)
(12)
(7)
DM-XM2 E
5-23
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8211-050 000 C 1 SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y
2 DA2-0712-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
3 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER
4 DA2-0703-000 000 C 1 EJECT LEVER
5 DA2-0642-000 000 F 3 SCREW
6 DA2-0661-000 000 C 1 COVER, PINCH ROLLER
7 DS1-0175-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
8 DG1-3859-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
9 DS1-0178-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
10 DY1-8375-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, T SUB
11 DA2-0782-000 000 F 1 WASHER
12 DA2-0660-000 000 C 1 COVER, REVIEW ARM
13 DF1-1548-000 000 C 1 TENSION ARM ASS’Y
14 DA2-0645-000 000 F 1 WASHER
15 DF1-1549-000 000 C 1 TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y
16 DS1-0169-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
17 DH9-0812-000 000 C 1 TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y
18 DA2-0643-000 000 F 1 SCREW
19 DS1-0173-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
DM-XM2 E
5-24
Mechanical Chassis Section-3
12×2
22×2
13
12×3
7
11
9
10
8
2
3
6
4
5
14
15
16
18
20
19
17
6
21
1×2
FACE
DM-XM2 E
5-25
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-0780-000 000 F 2 SCREW
2 DA2-0645-000 000 F 1 WASHER
3 DA2-0747-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL
4 DF1-1546-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, S
5 DF1-1547-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, T
6 DA2-0781-000 000 F 2 WASHER
7 DF1-1544-000 000 C 1 T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
8 DF1-1550-000 000 C 1 S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
9 DA2-0774-000 000 C 2 POST RING, RUBBER
10 DF1-1545-000 000 C 2 SKATE ASS’Y
11 DF1-1551-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y
12 DA2-0644-000 000 F 5 SCREW
13 DG1-3865-000 000 C 1 LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y
14 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER
15 DF1-1567-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE
16 DG1-3858-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER
17 DS1-0174-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
18 XD2-1100-102 000 C 1 E RING
19 DF1-1517-000 000 C 1 PLATE, DRIVE GEAR
20 DA2-0586-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CP
21 DH2-2115-000 000 C 1 FPC, LOADING MOTOR
22 XA1-7140-147 000 F 2 SCREW
DM-XM2 E
5-26
Mechanical Chassis Section-4
1×2
2
5
6
7
8
9
5
10
11
12
1
13
14
3
4
REAR FACE
DM-XM2 E
5-27
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA1-7140-147 000 F 3 SCREW
2 DF1-1525-000 000 C 1 GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS
3 DA2-0590-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 2
4 DF1-1520-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL
5 DA2-0643-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DF1-1516-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 1
7 DF1-1518-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, MODE
8 DA2-0640-000 000 C 1 COVER, MODE GEAR
9 DG1-3860-000 000 C 1 GEAR, MODE
10 DA2-0666-000 000 C 1 COVER, LM GEAR
11 DA2-0604-000 000 C 1 GEAR, LM
12 DA2-0630-000 000 C 1 LEVER, LOAD
13 DA2-0638-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER
14 DF1-1522-000 000 C 1 LEVER, SLIDE
DM-XM2 E
5-28
Accessories Section-1
1
PLUG TYPE
A
JPN
E
B
AS
CA-920 CB-920 DC-920
N.S. (Product available)
N.S. (Product available) N.S. (Product available)
N.S. (Product available)
WD-58H
N.S. (Product available)
4
5
2
3
HC-4100
DM-XM2 E
5-29
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC (E)
1 D82-0644-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC (UK)
1 D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC (A)
2 DY1-8472-000 000 C 1 HOOD
3 DY1-8230-000 000 C 1 CAP, LENS
4 DY1-8231-000 000 C 1 CAP, DUST
5 DY4-4633-000 000 C 1 KEY, SPARE
DM-XM2 E
5-30
Accessories Section-2
1
SDC-8M
N.S. Commercially available.
Make copy sample
pictures if necessary
(4)
(3)
WL-D77/WL-D77A
2
5
N.S. (Product available)
IFC-300PCU BP-915
N.S. (Product available)
DM-XM2 E
5-31
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 D54-0110-000 000 C 1 EYE CUP, LARGE NEW
2 D83-0582-000 000 C 1 WL-D77A WIRELESS CONTROLLER
3 DY1-8119-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A)
4 DY1-8121-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY
5 D81-1350-001 000 C 1 STRAP, SHOULDER SS-650 NEW
DM-XM2 E
5-32
Accessories Section-3
1
2
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
3×4
15×2
18×2
15×2
20
16
17
21
22
12×4
13
14
MA-300
N.S. (Product available)
DM-XM2 E
5-33
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DY4-6712-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y NEW
2 DY4-6698-000 000 B 1 PLATE, CONNECTOR NEW
3 DY4-6711-000 000 C 4 SCREW, 2.6*6 NEW
4 DY4-6701-000 000 B 1 JACK, BNC-RCA NEW
5 DY4-6696-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, MIC(B) NEW
6 DY4-6697-000 000 C 2 CHSHION, MIC NEW
7 DY4-6705-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, MA-300 NEW
8 DY4-6695-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, MIC(T) NEW
9 DY4-6706-000 000 C 1 SCREW, KNOB NEW
10 DY4-6707-000 000 C 1 WASHER, M3 NEW
11 DY4-6699-000 000 C 1 NUT, INSERT NEW
12 DY4-6708-000 000 C 4 SCREW, 1.7*6 NEW
13 DY4-6700-000 000 B 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY NEW
14 DY4-6693-000 000 B 1 COVER, UPPER NEW
15 DY4-6710-000 000 C 4 SCREW, 3*10 NEW
16 DY4-6702-000 000 C 1 CABLE, CONNECTOR NEW
17 DY4-6694-000 000 B 1 COVER, BOTTOM NEW
18 DY4-6709-000 000 C 4 SCREW, 2*4 NEW
20 DG1-4105-000 000 C 1 BASE, MIC NEW
21 DY4-6703-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AV-RCA NEW
22 DY4-6704-000 000 C 1 CABE, CLIP NEW
MECHANICAL PARTS
DM-XM2 E
5-34
Accessories Section-4
2
1
3
VL-3
N.S. (Product available)
DM-50
N.S. (Product available)
4
PC-A10
DM-XM2 E
5-35
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DY1-8246-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, FRONT
2 DY1-8247-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, REAR
3 DY1-8245-000 000 E 1 LAMP, HAROGEN
4 DY4-3338-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, SCART PC-A10
MECHANICAL PARTS
DM-XM2 E
5-36
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELECTRICAL PARTS
MAIN P.C.B.
CN103 VS1-5687-010 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 10P
CN301 VS1-6450-010 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 10P NEW
CN302 VS1-6450-011 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 11P
CN303 VS1-6597-005 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 5P NEW
CN304 VS1-6851-033 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 33P NEW
CN701 VS1-6851-023 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 23P NEW
CN801 VS1-6450-008 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 8P
CN1501 VS1-6450-016 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 16P NEW
CN2000 VS1-5817-010 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 10P
CN2901 VS1-6647-033 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 33P NEW
CN2902 VS1-6210-003 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 3P NEW
CN3201 VS1-5975-003 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 3P NEW
! FU3201 VD7-2241-501 000 D 1 FUSE
! FU3203 VD7-2241-001 000 D 1 FUSE
! FU3204 VD7-2241-501 000 D 1 FUSE
! FU3205 VD7-2241-501 000 D 1 FUSE
! FU3206 VD7-2241-001 000 D 1 FUSE
! FU3207 VD7-2241-001 000 D 1 FUSE
MJ P.C.B.
CN701 WS1-5815-000 000 C 1 JACK, MIC
CN702 WD9-5089-000 000 C 1 JACK, LANC
CN801 WS1-5717-000 000 C 1 JACK, HEAD-PHONE
JACK FPC
CN1 WD9-5092-000 000 C 1 JACK, LANC
CN2 WS1-6004-000 000 C 1 JACK, USB
CN3 WS1-6015-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, IEEE1394
CN4 WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, A/V
CN5 WS1-5445-000 000 C 1 JACK, S-TERMINAL
DM-XM2 E
5-37
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
CA1-8666-000 000 B 1 BASE, ACCESSORY SHOE NEW
CA1-9328-000 000 B 1 SPRING, PLATE (BL)
D52-0210-000 000 C 1 HOOD, LENS NEW
D54-0110-000 000 C 1 EYE CUP, LARGE NEW
D81-1350-001 000 C 1 STRAP, SHOULDER SS-650 NEW
D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC (E)
D82-0644-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC (UK)
D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC (A)
D83-0582-000 000 C 1 WL-D77A WIRELESS CONTROLLER
DA1-0740-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y
DA1-9381-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, KNOB
DA1-9551-000 000 B 1 RUBBER, BOTTOM
DA1-9556-000 000 B 1 SEAL, 3CCD
DA1-9557-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, LENS
DA1-9558-000 000 B 1 SEAL, MIC
DA1-9573-000 000 F 1 KEY, TRIGGER
DA1-9574-000 000 F 1 LEVER, STANDBY
DA1-9575-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, TRIGGER KEY
DA1-9576-000 000 F 1 SPRING, PLATE
DA1-9588-000 000 F 1 KEY, GRIP OPEN
DA1-9618-000 000 B 1 KNOB, HOLD KEY
DA1-9760-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK
DA1-9903-000 000 B 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS
DA2-0586-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CP
DA2-0590-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 2
DA2-0604-000 000 C 1 GEAR, LM
DA2-0630-000 000 C 1 LEVER, LOAD
DA2-0638-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER
DA2-0640-000 000 C 1 COVER, MODE GEAR
DA2-0642-000 000 F 7 SCREW
DA2-0643-000 000 F 7 SCREW
DA2-0644-000 000 F 5 SCREW
DA2-0645-000 000 F 2 WASHER
DA2-0646-000 000 F 3 WASHER
DA2-0660-000 000 C 1 COVER, REVIEW ARM
DA2-0661-000 000 C 1 COVER, PINCH ROLLER
DA2-0666-000 000 C 1 COVER, LM GEAR
DA2-0703-000 000 C 1 EJECT LEVER
DA2-0712-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
DA2-0747-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL
DA2-0757-000 000 F 1 SCREW
DA2-0758-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
DA2-0774-000 000 C 2 POST RING, RUBBER
DA2-0780-000 000 F 2 SCREW
DA2-0781-000 000 F 2 WASHER
DA2-0782-000 000 F 1 WASHER
DA2-0793-000 000 C 1 PLATE, TAPE GUIDE
DA2-1162-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION
DA2-1423-000 000 C 1 MAGNET, CARD
DA2-1737-000 000 C 1 MAGNET
DA2-1871-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER NEW
DA2-1872-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW
DA2-1873-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE NEW
DA2-1875-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, MODE SWITCH NEW
DA2-1876-000 000 B 1 SWITCH PHOTO NEW
9
9
3
31
31
29
29
29
31
21
11
7
19
19
9
5
5
5
5
5
9
11
17
25
27
27
27
27
27
21,23
21,23,27
25
23
21,23,25
23
23
27
23
23
25
21
21
25
25
25
23
21
17
13
15
17
5
5
5
5
DM-XM2 E
5-38
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
DA2-1881-000 000 C 2 PLATE, NUT NEW
DA2-1887-000 000 C 1 WINDOW, CASSETTE NEW
DA2-1888-000 000 B 1 COVER, MIC JACK NEW
DA2-1889-000 000 B 1 COVER, LENS L SIDE NEW
DA2-1890-000 000 C 1 PLATE, C LOCK NEW
DA2-1891-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA NEW
DA2-1892-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD PM1 NEW
DA2-1893-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD PM2 NEW
DA2-1895-000 000 B 2 MASK POST NEW
DA2-1897-000 000 C 1 GUARD, RKEY FPC NEW
DA2-1898-000 000 C 1 COVER, CP NEW
DA2-1899-000 000 C 1 COVER, MICOM NEW
DA2-1902-000 000 B 1 KEY, POWER TOP NEW
DA2-1903-000 000 B 1 KNOB, POWER LOCK NEW
DA2-1904-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, POWER KEY NEW
DA2-1905-000 000 C 1 SPRING, POWER CLICK NEW
DA2-1908-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, SD NEW
DA2-1909-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CAMEHOL EARTH NEW
DA2-1910-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CAMERA NEW
DA2-1911-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LENS NEW
DA2-1914-000 000 C 1 PLATE, G NEW
DA2-1916-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEVEL METER NEW
DA2-1917-000 000 B 1 FRAME, LEVEL METER NEW
DA2-1918-000 000 B 1 WINDOW, LEVEL METER NEW
DA2-1919-000 000 B 1 KNOB, C-KEY NEW
DA2-1920-000 000 B 1 RUBBER, ZEBRA NEW
DA2-1921-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, C-DIAL NEW
DA2-1923-000 000 C 1 LEVER, VAP LOCK NEW
DA2-1928-000 000 B 1 COVER, LITHIUM BATT NEW
DA2-1929-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LEVEL LCD NEW
DA2-1930-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT 2 NEW
DA2-1931-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, SD NEW
DA2-1933-000 000 B 1 COVER, SD2 NEW
DA2-1936-000 000 B 1 COVER, HANDLE(B) NEW
DA2-1937-000 000 B 1 COVER, R-KEY NEW
DA2-1941-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, HOLD KNOB NEW
DA2-1942-000 000 C 1 ARM, R-KEY COVER NEW
DA2-1944-000 000 C 1 BASE PLATE, AC SHOE NEW
DA2-1945-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, STRAP NEW
DA2-1953-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, MIC NEW
DA2-1954-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, DIOPTRIC(T) NEW
DA2-1955-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, DIOPTRIC(B) NEW
DA2-1956-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW
DA2-1957-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW
DA2-1958-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, EYE PIECE LENS NEW
DA2-1959-000 000 B 1 EYE CUP NEW
DA2-1961-000 000 B 1 KNOB, DIOPTRIC ADJ NEW
DA2-1968-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM NEW
DA2-1969-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LCD NEW
DA2-1970-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE(T) NEW
DA2-1971-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE(B) NEW
DA2-1972-000 000 B 2 DIAL, MIC VOL NEW
DA2-1973-000 000 B 1 KNOB, MIC VOL1 NEW
DA2-1974-000 000 B 1 KNOB, MIC VOL2 NEW
DA2-1976-000 000 B 1 KNOB, AUDIO NEW
5,17
5
5
5
5
17
17
17
5
9
17
17
7
7
7
7
13
17
17
17
17
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
15
15
15
15
13
13
13
13
DM-XM2 E
5-39
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
13
11
15
17
5
7
3
3
3
3
13
13
13
9
9
9
11
11
9
9
9
11
3
3
17
17
17
15
17
17
7
21
27
25
27
27
27
27
25
25
25
25
23
23
25
25
25
5
9
15
3
21
25
23
27
DA2-1977-000 000 B 1 KNOB, MODE NEW
DA2-1982-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF CLEANING NEW
DA2-1983-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MAGNET NEW
DA2-1984-000 000 C 1 CPACER, FPC NEW
DA2-1985-000 000 B 1 STRAP ASS’Y, HAND NEW
DA2-1988-000 000 B 1 LEVER, BATTERY LOCK NEW
DA2-1989-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK
DA2-1990-000 000 B 1 COVER, BOTTOM NEW
DA2-1991-000 000 C 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW
DA2-1994-000 000 C 1 LABEL, LI NEW
DA2-1995-000 000 B 1 PLATE, LCD EARTH NEW
DA2-1996-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, SPEAKER NEW
DA2-1997-000 000 B 1 PLATE MAGNET NEW
DA2-1998-000 000 C 1 SPRING, R-KEY NEW
DA2-1999-000 000 C 1 PLATE, AC SHOE GND1 NEW
DA2-2000-000 000 C 1 PLATE, AC SHOE GND2 NEW
DA2-2006-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, FPC NEW
DA2-2007-000 000 C 1 CUSION, LCD CVF NEW
DA2-2013-000 000 B 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY NEW
DA2-2034-000 000 C 1 SEPARATOR, RT-FPC NEW
DA2-2035-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, PHOTO-KEY NEW
DA2-2036-000 000 C 1 SPACER, LENS NEW
DA2-2039-000 000 C 1 PLATE, RATING NEW
DA2-2044-000 000 C 1 CUSION, FERRITE CORE NEW
DA2-2046-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CA EARTH NEW
DA2-2051-000 000 C 1 PLATE, RH EARTH NEW
DA2-2052-000 000 C 1 SPRING PLATE NEW
DA2-2058-000 000 C 1 LCD SHEET NEW
DA2-2090-000 000 C 1 SHEET, CASSETTE
DA2-2092-000 000 C 1 SEAL, PUSH
DF1-1473-000 000 C 1 CONTACT ASS’Y, BATTERY
DF1-1514-000 000 C 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y
DF1-1516-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 1
DF1-1517-000 000 C 1 PLATE, DRIVE GEAR
DF1-1518-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, MODE
DF1-1520-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL
DF1-1522-000 000 C 1 LEVER, SLIDE
DF1-1525-000 000 C 1 GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS
DF1-1544-000 000 C 1 T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
DF1-1545-000 000 C 2 SKATE ASS’Y
DF1-1546-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, S
DF1-1547-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, T
DF1-1548-000 000 C 1 TENSION ARM ASS’Y
DF1-1549-000 000 C 1 TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y
DF1-1550-000 000 C 1 S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
DF1-1551-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y
DF1-1567-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE
DF1-1654-000 000 B 1 CASSETTE ARMU ASS’Y NEW
DF1-1655-000 000 C 1 PLATE, R-KEY NEW
DF1-1658-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW
DG1-3740-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS
DG1-3857-000 000 C 1 DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y
DG1-3858-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER
DG1-3859-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
DG1-3860-000 000 C 1 GEAR, MODE
DM-XM2 E
5-40
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
DG1-3861-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y
DG1-3865-000 000 C 1 LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y
DG1-3978-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, DMC
DG1-4067-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (CVF)
DG1-4105-000 000 C 1 BASE, MIC NEW
DG1-4433-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, C-DIAL NEW
DG1-4434-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MJ NEW
DG1-4435-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CARD NEW
DG1-4436-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD NEW
DG1-4438-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, R-KEY NEW
DG1-4439-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, C-KEY1 NEW
DG1-4440-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, C-KEY2 NEW
DG1-4441-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, C-KEY3 NEW
DG1-4442-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LENS NEW
DG1-4444-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, GY NEW
DG1-4447-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CA NEW
DG1-4448-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW
DG1-4454-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, JACK NEW
DG1-4455-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, TRIGGER NEW
DG1-4456-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, RT NEW
DG1-4458-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, RKEY-MAIN NEW
DG1-4459-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, MIC VOL NEW
DG1-4460-000 000 C 1 FPC, ASSY MAIN-CK2
DG1-4461-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, REC-SERCH NEW
DG1-4462-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-SW1 NEW
DG1-4463-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CARD-MAIN NEW
DG1-4494-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, SHOE NEW
DG1-7296-000 000 C 1 SHOE CONNECTOR ASS’Y
DG1-7377-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y, LCD
DG1-7394-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, AUDIO NEW
DG1-7395-000 000 B 1 ZOOM KEY ASS’Y NEW
DG1-7396-000 000 B 1 HINGE ASS’Y NEW
DG1-7397-000 000 B 1 HINGE ASS’Y, EVF NEW
DG1-7401-000 000 C 1 3P PRISM ASS’Y NEW
DG1-7423-000 000 C 1 MICROPHONE ASS’Y NEW
DH2-2115-000 000 C 1 FPC, LOADING MOTOR
DH2-2292-000 000 C 1 FPC, MJ-RKEY NEW
DH2-2293-000 000 B 1 FPC, CVF-MAIN NEW
DH2-2294-000 000 C 1 FPC, 5P NEW
DH2-2295-000 000 C 1 FPC, 15P NEW
DH2-2298-000 000 C 1 FPC, 6P NEW
DH2-2300-000 000 B 1 FPC, LCD-MAIN NEW
DH2-2301-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-MJ NEW
DH2-2302-000 000 C 1 FPC, GY-CARD NEW
DH9-0812-000 000 C 1 TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y
*1 DH9-0831-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
DS1-0152-000 000 F 1 SPRING, COIL
DS1-0157-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
DS1-0169-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
DS1-0173-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
DS1-0174-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
DS1-0175-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
DS1-0178-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
DS1-5418-000 000 C 1 SPRING, SD NEW
DS1-5419-000 000 C 1 SPRING, POWER LOCK NEW
21
25
17
11
33
13
17
13
15
9
13
13
13
17
17
17
11
17
5
9
9
13
3
13
15
17
9
9
15
13
5
15
11
17
9
25
9
11
13
13
13
15
17
17
23
15
5
7
23
23
25
23
23
13
7
DM-XM2 E
5-41
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
DY1-8119-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A)
DY1-8121-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY
DY1-8182-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, PROTECT
DY1-8210-000 000 C 1 MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y
DY1-8211-050 000 C 1 SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y
DY1-8230-000 000 C 1 CAP, LENS
DY1-8231-000 000 C 1 CAP, DUST
DY1-8245-000 000 E 1 LAMP, HAROGEN
DY1-8246-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, FRONT
DY1-8247-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, REAR
DY1-8264-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC2
*2 DY1-8274-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
DY1-8283-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y (3CH)
DY1-8375-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, T SUB
DY1-8451-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR NEW
DY1-8453-000 000 B 1 COVER, ASS’Y RIGHT NEW
DY1-8455-000 000 B 1 COVER, SD NEW
DY1-8456-000 000 B 1 COVER, ASS’Y LID NEW
DY1-8458-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER ASS’Y NEW
DY1-8459-000 000 B 1 COVER, ASS’Y TOP NEW
DY1-8461-000 000 B 1 COVER, HANDLE(T) NEW
DY1-8463-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, MIC NEW
DY1-8465-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW
DY1-8466-000 000 B 1 VAP ASS’Y NEW
DY1-8467-000 000 C 1 ZOOM LENS ASS’Y NEW
DY1-8468-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, MAIN NEW
DY1-8472-000 000 C 1 HOOD
DY1-8482-000 000 B 1 KEY, MODE
DY4-3338-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, SCART PC-A10
DY4-4633-000 000 C 1 KEY, SPARE
DY4-6693-000 000 B 1 COVER, UPPER NEW
DY4-6694-000 000 B 1 COVER, BOTTOM NEW
DY4-6695-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, MIC(T) NEW
DY4-6696-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, MIC(B) NEW
DY4-6697-000 000 C 2 CHSHION, MIC NEW
DY4-6698-000 000 B 1 PLATE, CONNECTOR NEW
DY4-6699-000 000 C 1 NUT, INSERT NEW
DY4-6700-000 000 B 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY NEW
DY4-6701-000 000 B 1 JACK, BNC-RCA NEW
DY4-6702-000 000 C 1 CABLE, CONNECTOR NEW
DY4-6703-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AV-RCA NEW
DY4-6704-000 000 C 1 CABE, CLIP NEW
DY4-6705-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, MA-300 NEW
DY4-6706-000 000 C 1 SCREW, KNOB NEW
DY4-6707-000 000 C 1 WASHER, M3 NEW
DY4-6708-000 000 C 4 SCREW, 1.7*6 NEW
DY4-6709-000 000 C 4 SCREW, 2*4 NEW
DY4-6710-000 000 C 4 SCREW, 3*10 NEW
DY4-6711-000 000 C 4 SCREW, 2.6*6 NEW
DY4-6712-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y NEW
! VD7-2241-001 000 D 3 FUSE
! VD7-2241-501 000 D 3 FUSE
VS1-5687-010 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 10P
VS1-5817-010 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 10P
VS1-5975-003 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 3P NEW
31
31
19
21
23
29
29
35
35
35
17
15
21
23
7
13
13
13
13
7
9
9
17
19
19
19
29
5
35
29
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
DM-XM2 E
5-42
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
VS1-6210-003 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 3P NEW
VS1-6450-008 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 8P
VS1-6450-010 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 10P NEW
VS1-6450-011 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 11P
VS1-6450-016 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 16P NEW
VS1-6597-005 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 5P NEW
VS1-6647-033 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 33P NEW
VS1-6851-023 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 23P NEW
VS1-6851-033 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 33P NEW
WD9-5089-000 000 C 1 JACK, LANC
WD9-5092-000 000 C 1 JACK, LANC
WE8-6025-000 000 C 2 CORE, FERRITE NEW
WG2-5209-000 000 C 1 LCD EVF NEW
WS1-5445-000 000 C 1 JACK, S-TERMINAL
WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, A/V
WS1-5717-000 000 C 1 JACK, HEAD-PHONE
WS1-5815-000 000 C 1 JACK, MIC
WS1-6004-000 000 C 1 JACK, USB
WS1-6015-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, IEEE1394
XA1-3170-409 000 F 4 SCREW
XA1-7140-147 000 F 5 SCREW
XA1-7140-167 000 F 1 SCREW
XA1-7170-167 000 F 2 SCREW NEW
XA1-7170-207 000 F 3 SCREW
XA1-7170-307 000 F 12 SCREW
XA1-7170-307 000 F 4 SCREW, MACH. PANHEAD, M1.7X3
XA1-7170-307 000 C 15 SCREW
XA1-7170-309 000 F 20 SCREW
XA1-7170-609 000 F 1 SCREW
XA4-4200-706 000 F 2 SCREW
XA4-9170-409 000 F 80 SCREW
XA4-9170-409 000 C 14 SCREW
XA4-9170-457 000 F 8 SCREW
XA4-9170-507 000 F 6 SCREW
XA4-9170-509 000 F 2 SCREW
XA4-9170-607 000 F 8 SCREW
XA4-9170-609 000 F 21 SCREW
XA4-9170-707 000 F 3 SCREW
XA4-9170-807 000 F 2 SCREW
XA9-1118-000 000 F 2 SCREW NEW
XA9-1283-000 000 F 3 SCREW
XA9-1382-000 000 F 3 SCREW NEW
XA9-1399-000 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
XD2-1100-102 000 C 1 E RING
YA1-2150-000 000 C 1 RING, FOCUS
YA1-2151-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FOCUS RING
YA1-2154-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, VAP LOCK
YA1-2155-000 000 B 1 RING, RUBBER FOCUS
YA1-2161-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
YA1-2163-000 000 C 2 SPACER, FOCUS RING
YA1-2179-000 000 F 2 SCREW
YA1-2845-000 000 B 1 SEAL, NAME RING NEW
YA1-2850-000 000 B 1 COVER, LENS NEW
YH1-0861-000 000 C 1 FPC, 15P NEW
YH7-0175-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, FOCUS
3
11
9
25,27
17
17
9
3,5,13
15
17
3,5,9,11
3
19
3,5,7,9,11,13,15
17
19
19
13
3,19
3,9,11,17
19
19
13
17
17
11
25
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
DM-XM2 E
5-43
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
YH7-0176-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, ZOOM
YH8-0117-000 000 C 1 IG METER NEW
YN1-1611-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYE
YN1-1612-000 000 C 1 LENS, INNER
19
19
11
11
CHAPTER 6. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CAMERA SECTION
SYSCON-SERVO SECTION
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION
CN703
CN702
CN701
CN801
CN802
1
23
1
22
2
15
MJ P.C.B.
DC
MIC
HEADPHONE
CARD DETECT
CARD P.C.B.
CN400
CN401
SW400
CN402
1 1 20
8
CN151
SW151
1
5
C-DIAL P.C.B.
SW102
SW103
IC701
CN701(AUDIO LCD UNIT)
CN100
SW100
SW101
SW104
1
15
C-KEY 1 P.C.B.
SW300
SW302
C
N
1
0
1
SW303
S
W
3
0
1
1
6
C-KEY3 P.C.B.
CA P.C.B.
1
1
2
69
70
CN1001
CN1051
IC1001
IC1003
IC1055
IC1006
IC1005
IC1052
IC1051
IC1057
IC1004
IC1054
IC
1
0
5
3
IC
1
0
5
6
2
39
40
1 16
16 1
CN4101
CN4102
CVF P.C.B.
CN1601
IC1602
IC1603
IC1601
IC1604
GY P.C.B.
1 8
LCD P.C.B.
27 26
26 1
1 5
1 2
CN901
CN903
CN902
IC901
IC903
IC902
LENS P.C.B.
2
59
60
1
2
1
1 15
38
39
CN101
CN103
CN101
CN102
CN102
CN103
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
33
1
JACK P.C.B.
CS P.C.B.
LANC
DV
AV
(USB)
BATTERY BOX UNIT
BLUE
RED
WHT
BATTERY
DETECT
( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS II ) DMC II
MAIN
CHASSIS
DRUM
MOTOR
LOADING
MOTOR,
DEW
SENSOR
SLIDE
CHASSIS
VIDEO
HEAD
33P FPC 5P FPC 11P FPC
8P
16P
13P
23P
39P
15P
10P FPC 10P FPC
60PIN BOARD TO BOARD
5P
15P
27P
23P
6P
20PIN BOARD
TO BOARD
40PIN BOARD TO BOARD
5
0
P
IN
B
O
A
R
D
T
O
B
O
A
R
D
30PIN BOARD TO BOARD
70PIN BOARD TO BOARD
BACK LIGHT
LCD PANEL
SD CARD
MIC_VOL FPC
MIC VOLUME P.C.B.
CVF PANEL
SW200
SW201
SW204
CN2
CN3
CN6
CN1
CN8
CN4
CN5
SW202 SW203
1
1
2
49
50
1
2
27
6
26
1
6
1
4
5
1
15
1
C-KEY 2 P.C.B.
LITHIUM
BATTERY
RED
BLK
SPEAKER
LCD CLOSE
DETECT
TRIGGER FPC
1
4
CN2
1 10
IC803
IC802
IC1501
IC4003
IC801
IC103
IC100
IC102
IC101
IC2100
IC104
IC2303
IC1202
IC1204
IC301
IC705
IC1054
IC4001
IC4002
IC4000
IC1052
IC1055
IC1261
IC1004
IC1005
IC2000
IC2301
IC1301
IC3501
IC3201
IC3500
IC2300
IC2601
MAIN P.C.B.
CN104
C
N
1
0
5
1
CN1501
CN101
CN701
CN801
CN303
CN304 CN302
CN2000
CN2902
CN1001
1
1
2
2 1
22 23
1 8
70
69
2
1
33
32
1 1 11
1
1 3
CN2900 C
N
1
0
3
CN2901
CN3201
CN301 CN100
1
1
1
32
3
1
33
2 1
9
20
1
2
19
20
10
10 2
1
2
59
60
29
30 CN102
1
2
29
30
16
1
2
19
19 20
1 2
20
1 5
2
10
4
6
1
8
1
1
ZOOM KEY
ZOOM_UNIT
REC_SERCH FPC
REC P.C.B.
MIC MIC FPC
RT FPC
LCD-SW1 FPC
IC
SHOE CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY
CN101
CN100
CN102
CN104
CN103
SW102
SW100
SW105 SW108 SW106 SW107 SW109 SW110 SW111
SW103
SW104
SW101
1
1
23
2
22
6
1
1
15
1 2
27 26
8
R-KEY P.C.B.
BLK
LENS UNIT
ZOOM MOTOR
FOCUS MOTOR
FOCUS SENS
ZOOM SENS
TEMP SENS
IG METER
*
Metal contact (Pins' face up) Metal contact (Pins' face down)
Metal contact
Metal contact
: :
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY, 2002
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
MAIN PCB C-DIAL PCB
CONNECTORS
CN101
1 MMC_LED
2 VTR_PW_SW
3 AUTO_MANUAL
4 VTR_PW_LED
5 CAM_PW_SW
6 AD_KEY1
7 CAM_PW_LED
8 MDIAL_CW
9 AD_KEY0
10 PNL_OPEN_SW
11 AD_KEY2
12 ND_SW
13 MDIAL_CCW
14 CDIAL_CW
15 CDIAL_SW
16 AF_SW
17 CDIAL_CCW
18 WB_SW
19 GAIN_SW
20 LM_CS
21 GND
22 AV_SO
23 AV_SCLK
24 DVDD3V
25 LM_RST
26 PAE/GRN_SW
27 SP_-
28 SP_+
29 LI_3V
30 GND
31 GND
32 PANEL_G
33 PANEL_R
34 GND
35 PANEL_B
36 PNL_BT_SW
37 LCD_ON
38 LCD_BL_ON
39 CSYNC1
40 MO_GND
41 VTR_UNREG
42 MO_GND
43 SOUT1
44 SCLK1
45 LCD_CEN
46 SIN1
47 LCD_EEP_CS
48 LCD3V
49 LCD12V
50 LCD_DA_LOAD
CN102
1 AD_KEY3
2 AD_KEY4
3 S/S_SW
4 PHOTO_SW
5 H_PHOTO_SW
6 GND
7 ZOOM_T
8 ZOOM_W
9 GND
10 RMC_IN
11 DVDD4.7V
12 TALLY_LED
13 DVDD3V
14 GND
15 CCC
16 AVEF
17 STSP
18 EFID
19 SHOE_UNREG
20 SHOE_UNREG
21 MO_GND
22 MO_GND
23 ID_1
24 SHOE_NC1
25 SHOE_NC2
26 ID_2
27
28
29
30
CN103
1 EJECT_SW
2 TAPE/CARD_SW
3 STANDBY_SW
4 GND
5 CAM3V
6 ZOOM_AD
7 GND
8 H_PHOTO_SW
9 PHOTO_SW
10 S/S_SW
CN104
1 GND
2 Y_GY_OFS
3 I_ISW
4 CAM_A3V
5 P_GY_AMP
6 GND
7 P_GY_OFS
8 CARD_CMD
9 Y_GY_AMP
10 GND
11 GND
12 CARD_CLK
13 CARD_DET
14 GND
15 CARD_OPEN
16 CARD_DAT
17 CARD_PRO
18 GND
19 GND
20 CARD3V
CN301
1 MIC1
2 MIC2
3 C_IN
4 MIC3
5 MICCINRECP_GND
6 REC_PRF
7 TR_C
8 TR_LED_A
9 TR_LED_K
10 TR_E
CN302
1 U
2 U
3 V
4 V
5 DFG
6 DPG
7 SENS_COM
8 SENS_GARD
9 COIL_COM
10 W
11 W
CN303
1 DEW
2 GND
3 N.C
4 LOAD(-)
5 LOAD(+)
CN304
1 U-
2 U+
3 V-
4 V+
5 C_H+
6 N.C GARD
7 U
8 U
9 C_H-
10 W-
11 W+
12 N.C GARD
13 LED_A
14 LED_K
15 MSW_Vss
16 MSW_Vcc
17 MSW_SENS
18 EOT_E
19 B&EOT_C
20 BOT_E
21 CFG_Vcc
22 CFG1
23 CFG_GND
24 CFG2
25 N.C GARD
26 SR_E
27 SR_C
28 SR_LED_A
29 SR_LED_K
30 V
31 V
32 W
33 W
CN701
1 MIC_L1
2 MIC_L2
3 MIC_R2
4 MIC_R1
5 MIC_GND
6 MIC_GND
7 MIC_GND
8 MIC_GND
9 MIC_GND
10 MIC_GND
11 MIC_GND
12 EXT_L
13 EXT_R
14 SHOE_5V_ON
15 EXT_DET
16 MIC_5V
17 MIC_5V
18 MIC_5V
19 HP_DET
20 HP-L
21 HP_R
22 GND
23 GND
CN801
1 GND
2 VOL_IN_R
3 GND
4 VOL_OUT_R
5 GND
6 VOL_OUT_L
7 GND
8 VOL_IN_L
CN1001
1 GND
2 GND
3 R[0]
4 VD2
5 R[1]
6 VD
7 R[2]
8 HD2
9 R[3]
10 HD
11 R[4]
12 F2CK
13 GND
14 GND
15 R[5]
16 FCK
17 R[6]
18 AGC_RST
19 R[7]
20 AGC_CS
21 R[8]
22 CAM_SOO
23 R[9]
24 CAM_SCLK0
25 GND
26 GND
27 G[0]
28 B[0]
29 G[1]
30 B[1]
31 G[2]
32 B[2]
33 G[3]
34 B[3]
35 G[4]
36 B[4]
37 GND
38 GND
39 G[5]
40 B[5]
41 G[6]
42 B[6]
43 G[7]
44 B[7]
45 G[8]
46 B[8]
47 G[9]
48 B[9]
49 GND
50 GND
51 CAM3V
52 GND
53 CAM3V
54 CAM4.7V
55 CAM3V
56 CAM4.7V
57 PLL
58 TG_CS
59 GND
60 TGNPSW
61 CCD+
62 CCDRD_INT
63 CCD+
64 FLDET
65 TG_SLEEP
66 FLRST
67 CCD-
68 DVSW_CAM
69 GND
70 GND
CN1051
1 EXMOD1
2 TMODE
3 R_P/D
4 VDDOUT
5 WTOM_VPP
6 VPPIN
7 WTOM_XRST
8 XRESET
9 N.C
10 RSTIC_OUT
11 TTXD
12 CTOM_DATA
13 CTOM_CLK
14 CTOM_DATA
15 CTOM_CLK
16 TCK
17 GNDOUT
18 VDDOUT
19 GND
20 VDD
CN1201
1 MO_GND
2 MO_GND
3 ZOOM_AA
4 FOCUS_AA
5 ZOOM_AB
6 FOCUS_AB
7 ZOOM_BA
8 FOCUS_BA
9 ZOOM_BB
10 FOCUS_BB
11 MO_GND
12 MO_GND
13 ZOOM_LED1
14 ZOOM_SENS1
15 ZOOM_VCC
16 ZOOM_SENS2
17 ZOOM_LED2
18 MF_LED
19 MO_GND
20 N.C
21 HALL_IN+
22 THERMO_GND
23 HALL_OUT+
24 ND_HL_IN+
25 HALL_IN-
26 ND_HL_OUT+
27 HALL_OUT-
28 ND_HL_IN-
29 DUMP-
30 ND_HL_OUT-
31 DUMP+
32 ND_DUMP-
33 DRIVE-
34 ND_DUMP+
35 DRIVE+
36 ND_DRIVE-
37 FOCUS_LED
38 ND_DRIVE+
39 FOCUS_SENS
40 THERMO_VDD
41 FOCUS_VCC
42 THERMO_OUT
43 MO_GND
44 THERMO_GND
45 N.C
46 CAM4.7V
47 P5V
48 CAM4.7V
49 P5V
50 VC
51 LPF_PPWM
52 CAM3V
53 LPF_YPWM
54 CAM3V
55 P_PSD
56 FOCUS_KEY1
57 Y_PSD
58 FOCUS_KEY0
59 GND
60 GND
CN1501
1 VDD
2 VST
3 VCK
4 STB
5 EN
6 HST
7 HCK2
8 HCK1
9 GND
10 B
11 R
12 G
13 COM
14 BL5V
15 BL5V
16 GND
CN2900
1 V_I/O
2 FCHD
3 VTR_POW_SW
4 CAM3V
5 STANDBY
6 MIC2
7 T/C_POW_SW
8 MIC3
9 CAM_POW_SW
10 ADJ_SW
11 LANC_OUT
12 VTRTC_DATA
13 GND
14 CTVTR_DATA
15 GND
16 CVTR_CLK
17 SWP
18 ADJ_CS
19 PBRF
20 ADJ_REQ
CN2901
1 VIF_GND
2 Y_I/O
3 VIF_GND
4 VIF_GND
5 C_I/O
6 S_DET
7 VIF_GND
8 V_I/O
9 VIF_GND
10 AV_DET
11 AUDIO_L
12 VIF_GND
13 VIF_GND
14 AUDIO_R
15 GND
16 GND
17 GND
18 TPB
19 XTPB
20 XTPA
21 TPA
22 GND
23 GND
24 D+
25 D-
26 GND
27 GND
28 VBUS
29 GND
30 LANC_OUT
31 LANC_DC
32 GND
33 GND
CN2902
1 PBRF
2 GND
3 SWP
CN3201
1 BATT-
2 BATT_INFO
3 BATT+
CN151
1 N.C
2 GND
3 CDIAL_CCW
4 CDIAL_CW
5 CDIAL_SW
CN2
1 MO_GND
2 MO_GND
3 MO_GND
4 VTR_UNREG
5 VTR_UNREG
6 VTR_UNREG
7 LCD3V
8 LCD3V
9 LCD_DA_LOAD
10 LCD12V
11 LCD_BL_ON
12 LCD_ON
13 PNL_BT_SW
14 GND
15 GND
16 LCD_CEN
17 LCD_EEP_CS
18 SIN1
19 SOUT1
20 SCLK1
21 GND
22 CSYNC1
23 GND
24 PANEL_B
25 PANEL_G
26 PANEL_R
27 PANEL_R
CN3
1 AF_SW
2 ND_SW
3 DE_ON
4 DE_SEL
5 GND
6 AV_SO
7 AV_SCLK
8 LM_CS
9 DVDD3V
10 LM_RST
11 CAM_PW_SW
12 VTR_PW_SW
13 N.C
14 N.C
15 N.C
CN4
CN100
1 LCD12V
2 LCD_DA_LOAD
3 LCD_EEP_CS
4 LCD_3V
5 LCD_CEN
6 SIN1
7 SOUT1
8 SCLK1
9 VTR_UNREG
10 MO_GND
11 CSYNC1
12 MO_GND
13 LCD_ON
14 LCD_BL_ON
15 PANEL_B
16 PNL_BT_SW
17 PANEL_R
18 GND
19 GND
20 PANEL_G
21 LI_3V
22 GND
23 SP_-
24 SP_+
25 LM_RST
26 PAE/GRN_SW
27 AV_SCLK
28 DVDD3V
29 GND
30 AV_SO
31 GAIN_SW
32 LM_CS
33 CDIAL_CCW
34 WB_SW
35 CDIAL_SW
36 AF_SW
37 MDIAL_CCW
38 CDIAL_CW
39 AD_KEY2
40 ND_SW
41 AD_KEY0
42 PNL_OPEN_SW
43 CAM_PW_LED
44 MDIAL_CW
45 CAM_PW_SW
46 AD_KEY1
47 AUTO_MANUAL
48 VTR_PW_LED
49 MMC_LED
50 VTR_PW_SW
CN901
1 PNL_BT_SW
2 GND
3 LCD3V
4 N.C
5 N.C
CN902
1 PANEL_R
2 PANEL_G
3 PANEL_B
4 GND
5 CSYNC1
6 GND
7 SCLK1
8 SOUT1
9 SIN1
10 LCD_EEP_CS
11 LCD_CEN
12 GND
13 GND
14 PNL_BT_SW
15 LCD_ON
16 LCD_BL_ON
17 LCD12V
18 LCD_DA_LOAD
C KEY2 PCB
CN4101
1 GND
2 BL5V
3 BL5V
4 COM
5 G
6 R
7 B
8 GND
9 HCK1
10 HCK2
11 HST
R KEY PCB
CN1001
1 GND
2 GND
3 SIG_G
4 SUB_R
5 GND
6 V1G
7 SIG_R
8 V2G
9 GND
10 V3G
11 GND
12 V4G
13 (-7V)
14 SUB_G
15 GND
16 GND
17 GND
18 H2G
19 H2R
20 H1G
21 H1R
22 GND
23 GND
24 GND
25 CCDRST
26 H2B
27 GND
28 H1B
29 15V
30 GND
31 V4RB
32 SUB_B
33 V3RB
34 GND
35 V2RB
36 GND
37 V1RB
38 SIG_B
39 B_GND
40 B_GND
12 EN
13 STB
14 VCK
15 VST
16 VDD
CN4102
1 VDD
2 VSS
3 VST
4 VCK
5 STB
6 EN
7 DWN
8 RGT
9 HST
10 HCK2
11 HCK1
12 BLK
13 B
14 R
15 G
16 COM
CN1601
1 GND
2 CAM_A3V
3 Y_GY_OFS
4 Y_GY_AMP
5 P_GY_OFS
6 P_GY_AMP
7 I_ISW
8 GND
LCD PCB
12 MIC_GND
13 MIC_GND
14 MIC_GND
15 MIC_GND
16 MIC_GND
17 MIC_GND
18 MIC_GND
19 MIC_R1
20 MIC_R2
21 MIC_L2
22 MIC_L1
23 MIC_L1
CN100
1 N.C
2 N.C
3 N.C
4 VTR_PW_SW
5 CAM_PW_SW
6 LM_RST
7 DVDD3V
8 LM_CS
9 AV_SCLK
10 AV_SO
11 GND
12 DE_SEL
13 DE_ON
14 ND_SW
15 AF_SW
CVF PCB
CN101
1 SHOE_5V
2 SHOE_5V
3 SHOE_MIC_L
4 SHOE_MIC_R
5 MIC_GND
6 MIC_GND
7 MIC_GND
8 MIC_GND
9 MIC_GND
10 MIC_GND
11 MIC_GND
12 MIC_R1
13 MIC_R2
14 MIC_L2
15 MIC_L1
CN102
1 MIC_GND
2 MIC_L1
3 MIC_GND
4 MIC_R2
5 MIC_L2
6 MIC_GND
7 MIC_R1
8 MIC_GND
CN103
1 UNREG
2 UNREG
3 UNREG
4 UNREG
5 UNREG _GND
6 UNREG _GND
7 UNREG _GND
8 UNREG _GND
9 ID_1
10 SHOE_5V
11 SHOE_5V
12 MIC_GND
13 MIC_GND
14 MIC_GND
15 MIC_GND
16 SHOE_MIC_L
17 SHOE_MIC_R
18 GND
19 STSPC
20 AVEFI
21 CCC
22 EFIDO
23 EFIDO
CN104
1 DVDD3V
2 TALLY_LED
3 N.C
4 GND
5 DVDD4.7V
6 RMC_IN
19 LCD3V
20 LCD3V
21 VTR_UNREG
22 VTR_UNREG
23 VTR_UNREG
24 MO_GND
25 MO_GND
26 MO_GND
27 MO_GND
CN903
1 N.C
2 CKH1
3 CKH2
4 PCG
5 XPCG
6 HVDD
7 STH
8 XSTH
9 HVSS
10 CSH
11 G
12 R
13 B
14 PCD
15 N.C
16 CSV
17 VVDD
18 ENB
19 XENB
20 VVSS
21 STV
22 XSTV
23 CKV1
24 CKV2
25 COM
26 N.C
46 B(8)
47 G(9)
48 B(9)
49 GND
50 GND
51 CAM3V
52 GND
53 CAM3V
54 CAM4.7V
55 CAM3V
56 CAM4.7V
57 PLL
58 TG_CS
59 GND
60 TGNPSW
61 CCD+
62 CCDRD_INT
63 CCD+
64 FLDET
65 TG_SLEEP
66 FLRST
67 CCD-
68 DVSW_CAM
69 GND
70 GND
CA PCB
GY PCB
MJ PCB
CN701
1 MIC_GND
2 EXT_L
3 EXT_R
4 N.C
5 N.C
6 GND
7 SHOE_MIC_L
8 SHOE_MIC_R
CN702
1 N.C
2 MIC_5V
3 N.C
CN703
1 SHOE_5V
2 SHOE_5V
3 SHOE_MIC_L
4 SHOE_MIC_R
5 MIC_GND
6 MIC_GND
7 MIC_GND
8 MIC_GND
9 MIC_GND
10 MIC_GND
11 MIC_GND
12 MIC_R1
13 MIC_R2
14 MIC_L2
15 MIC_L1
CN801
1 GND
2 HP_L
3 HP_R
4 GND
5 HP_DET
CN802
1 GND
2 HP_R
3 HP_L
4 HP_DET
5 MIC_5V
6 MIC_5V
7 MIC_5V
8 EXT_DET
9 SHOE_5V_ON
10 EXT_R
11 EXT_L
30 ND_HL_OUT-
31 DUMP+
32 ND_DUMP-
33 DRIVE-
34 ND_DUMP+
35 DRIVE+
36 ND_DRIVE-
37 FOCUS_LED
38 ND_DRIVE+
39 FOCUS_SENS
40 THERMO_VDD
41 FOCUS_VCC
42 THERMO_OUT
43 MD_GND
44 THERMO_GND
45 N.C
46 CAM4.7V
47 VAP_P5V
48 CAM4.7V
49 VAP_P5V
50 VC
CN701
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 COM3
4 S1
5 S2
6 S3
7 S4
8 S5
9 S6
10 S7
11 S8
12 S9
13 S10
14 S11
15 S12
16 S13
17 S14
18 S15
19 S16
20 S17
21 S18
22 S19
23 S20
24 S21
25 S22
26 S23
27 S24
28 N.C
CKEY1 PCB
LENS PCB
CN101
1 ZOOM A(AA)
2 ZOOM A(AB)
3 ZOOM B(BA)
4 ZOOM B(BB)
5 FOCUS A(AA)
6 FOCUS A(AB)
7 FOCUS B(BA)
8 FOCUS B(BB)
9 ZOOM_LED1
10 ZOOM SENS1
11 ZOOM VCC
12 ZOOM_LED2
13 ZOOM SENS2
14 GND
15 HALL_IN(+)
16 HALL_OUT(+)
17 HALL_IN(-)
18 HALL_OUT(-)
19 DUMP-
20 DUMP+
51 LPF_YPWM
52 CAM3V
53 LPF_PPWM
54 CAM3V
55 P_PSD
56 FOCUS_KEY1
57 Y_PSD
58 FOCUS_KEY0
59 GND
60 GND
CKEY3 PCB
CN101
1 AUTO_MANUAL
2 PAE/GRN_SW
3 MDIAL_CW
4 MDIAL_CCW
5 GND
6 AD_KEY2
CARD PCB
CN400
1 GND
2 CARD_PRO
3 CARD_OPEN
4 CARD_DET
5 GND
6 CARD_VDD
7 GND
8 CARD_DAT
9 GND
10 CARD_CLK
11 GND
12 CARD_CMD
13 GND
14 CAM_A3V
15 Y_GY_OFS
16 Y_GY_AMP
17 P_GY_OFS
18 P_GY_AMP
19 I_ISW
20 GND
CN401
1 MMC_RSV
2 MMC_CMD
3 MMC_VSS1
4 MMC_VDD
5 MMC_CLK
6 MMC_VSS1
7 MMC_DAT
8 MMC_DAT1
9 MMC_DAT2
10 CARD_PRO
11 GND
12 CARD_DET
CN402
1 GND
2 I_ISW
3 P_GY_AMP
4 P_GY_OFS
5 Y_GY_AMP
6 Y_GY_OFS
7 CAM_A3V
8 GND
TRIG FPC
CN100
1 MO_GND
2 SHOE_NC1
3 ID_2
4 N.C
5 SHOE_NC2
6 ID_1
7 MO_GND
8 SHOE_UNREG
9 STSP
10 CCC
11 DVDD3V
12 DVDD4.7V
13 GND
14 ZOOM_T
15 H_PHOTO_SW
16 S/S_SW
17 AD_KEY3
18 AD_KEY4
19 PHOTO_SW
20 GND
21 ZOOM_W
22 RMC_IN
23 TALLY_LED
24 GND
25 AVEF
26 EFID
27 SHOE_UNREG
CN4
1 AUTO_MANUAL
2 PAE/GRN_SW
3 MDIAL_CW
4 MDIAL_CCW
5 GND
6 AD_KEY2
CN5
1 CDIAL_SW
2 CDIAL_CW
3 CDIAL_CCW
4 GND
5 N.C
CN6
1 SP_+
2 SP_-
3 PNL_OPEN_SW
4 GND
CN8
1 VTR_PW_LED
2 CAM_PW_LED
3 DVDD3V
4 GND
5 REC_-
6 REC_+
CN1051
1 GND
2 GND
3 R(0)
4 VD2
5 R(1)
6 VD
7 R(2)
8 HD2
9 R(3)
10 HD2
11 R(4)
12 F2CK
13 GND
14 GND
15 R(5)
16 FCK
17 R(6)
18 AGC_RST
19 R(7)
20 AGC_CS
21 R(8)
22 CAM_SO0
23 R(9)
24 CAM_SCLK0
25 GND
26 GND
27 G(0)
28 B(0)
29 G(1)
30 B(1)
31 G(2)
32 B(2)
33 G(3)
34 B(3)
35 G(4)
36 B(4)
37 GND
38 GND
39 G(5)
40 B(5)
41 G(6)
42 B(6)
43 G(7)
44 B(7)
45 G(8)
CN2
1 ZOOM_AD
2 CAM_3V
3 GND
4 GND
21 DRIVE(-)
22 DRIVE(+)
23 ND_HL_IN+
24 ND_HL_OUT+
25 ND_HL_IN-
26 ND_HL_OUT-
27 ND_DUMP-
28 ND_DUMP+
29 ND_DRIVE-
30 ND_DRIVE+
31 N.C
32 THERMO_GND
33 THERMO_VDD
34 THERMO_OUT
35 FOCUS LED
36 FOCUS SEMS
37 FOCUS VCC
38 N.C
39 N.C
CN102
1 FOCUS KEY0
2 FOCUS KEY1
3 MF_GND
4 MF_3V
5 VC
6 YPSD_OUT
7 P_GND
8 P_GND
9 LPF_PPWM
10 VAP_P5V
11 VAP_P5V
12 CAM_5V
13 LPF_YPWM
14 CAM_GND
15 PPSD_OUT
CN103
1 MD_GND
2 MD_GND
3 ZOOM_AA
4 FOCUS_AA
5 ZOOM_AB
6 FOCUS_AB
7 ZOOM_BA
8 FOCUS_BA
9 ZOOM_BB
10 FOCUS_BB
11 MD_GND
12 MD_GND
13 ZOOM_LED1
14 ZOOM_SENS1
15 ZOOM_VCC
16 ZOOM_SENS2
17 ZOOM_LED2
18 MF_LED
19 MD_GND
20 N.C
21 HALL_IN+
22 THERMO_GND
23 HALL_OUT+
24 ND_HL_IN+
25 HALL_IN-
26 ND_HL_OUT+
27 HALL_OUT-
28 ND_HL_IN-
29 DUMP-
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
CA PCB
IC1057
NJM2870F28
2.7V REG
29 15V
13 -7V
7 SIG R
3 SIG G
39 SIG B
4 SUB R
14 SUB G
32 SUB B
37 V1 RB
35 V2 RB
33 V3 RB
31 V4 RB
8 V1G
8 V2G
10 V3G
12 V4G
21 H1 R
19 H2 R
20 H1 G
18 H2 G
28 H1 B
26 H2 B
CCD 15V
CN1001
TO
LENS
UNIT
CCD -7V
CAM 3V V IN CAMREG 2.7V
IC1006
NJM2870F35
3.5V REG
IC1054
C3624
CDS/AGC/AD
IC1056
SN74AHC1G32HDCK
OR
IC1055
SN74AHC1G32HDCK
OR
IC1053
TC7W74FU
D-FF
IC1004
MN52A1
TIMING GENERATOR IC1001
MN3114
V DRIVE
IC1003
TC74VHC04FT
H DRIVE
CAM 5V V OUT
V OUT
V IN
4 5
4 5
1
2
4
5
3
8
18
11
15
23
43
80
3.5V
2.7V
CAM4.7V
CAMREG 2.7V
50MHz
CAM15V
CAM-7V
CAM3V
CDS
R IN
G IN
B IN
AVDD1 CAMREG 2.7V
AVDD2
AVDD3
AVDD4
31
38 39 40 41
30
29
32
33
OBP
CAMREG 2.7V
CAMREG 2.7V
CAMREG 2.7V
PBLK
CPOB
SHD
SHR
HD2
HD
VD
VD2
SCS
SDATA
DVSW CAM
TGNPSW
FCK
F2CK
F2CKI
SCLK
PDOWN
CLP
BLK
SHD
SHR
CDS
CDS
AGC
AGC
AGC
CONTROL
S
C
K
A/D
RDO9
RDO8
RDO7
RDO6
RDO5
RDO4
RDO3
RDO2
RDO1
RDO0
GDO9
CN1051
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
CN1001
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
CN1001
GDO8
GDO7
GDO6
GDO5
GDO4
GDO3
GDO2
GDO1
GDO0
BDO9
BDO8
BDO7
BDO6
BDO5
BDO4
BDO3
BDO2
BDO1
BDO0
A/D
A/D
23 R(9)
21 R(8)
19 R(7)
17 R(6)
15 R(5)
11 R(4)
9 R(3)
7 R(2)
5 R(1)
3 R(0)
47 G(9)
45 G(8)
43 G(7)
41 G(6)
39 G(5)
35 G(4)
33 G(3)
31 G(2)
29 G(1)
27 G(0)
48 B(9)
46 B(8)
44 B(7)
42 B(6)
40 B(5)
36 B(4)
34 B(3)
32 B(2)
30 B(1)
28 B(0)
8 HD2
10 HD
6 VD
4 VD2
20 AGC CS
18 AGC RST
58 TG CS
22 CAM SO0
24 CAM SCLK0
65 TG SLEEP
68 DVSW CAM
60 TGNPSW
16 FCK
12 F2CK
57 PLL
62 CCDRD INT
54 CAM4.7V
56 CAM4.7V
61 CCD+
63 CCD+
67 CCD-
51 CAM3V
53 CAM3V
55 CAM3V
S
D
A
T
A
C
S
N
R
E
S
E
T
N
37 36 35 34
R
O
C
K
G
O
C
K
B
O
C
K
A
D
C
K
7
25
40
58
CAM 3V
CCD 15V
CCD -7V
H2
H1
V4
V3
V2
V1
SUB
CH1
CH2
VDD-3
VDD-4
VDD-1
VDD-2
35 VDD3
3.5V
3.5V
2
1
4
2 5
1
5 8
CLK
D Q
IC1005
TC7WU04FU
INVERTER
2 64
8
6 7 1
15
16
17
18
10
2
58
54
4
1
19
11
47
46
9
8
CONTROL
TIMING
GENERATOR
12 13
1/2
2 1
37
36
8 9
6 5
10 11
4 3
14 VCC
1 13
11
9
15
17
10
14
16
12
6
23
19
3
5
22
20
4
8
21
33
31
32
27
28
29
30
24
18
2
OSUB
OV5
OV6
OV7
OV8
V1R
V2RB
V3RB
V4RB
V1G
V2G
V3G
V4G
OV1
OV2
OV3
OV4
VH
VH
VL
ISB
CH1
CH3
CH2
CH4
IV1
IV2
IV3
IV4
VCC
VM
H1R
H2R
H1G
H2G
H1B
H2B
67
68
69
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
54
55
56
CAMERA SECTION-1
CANON INC., 2002 C 01 JULY,2002
DATA COMMUNICATION
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
CARD USB/SIC SIGNAL
IC1002
NJM2870F35
3.5V REG
23 R(9)
21 R(8)
19 R(7)
17 R(6)
15 R(5)
13 R(4)
9 R(3)
7 R(2)
5 R(1)
3 R(0)
47 G(9)
45 G(8)
43 G(7)
41 G(6)
39 G(5)
35 G(4)
33 G(3)
31 G(2)
29 G(1)
27 G(0)
48 B(9)
46 B(8)
44 B(7)
42 B(6)
40 B(5)
36 B(4)
34 B(3)
32 B(2)
30 B(1)
28 B(0)
4 VD2
8 HD2
16 FCK
12 F2CK
6 VD
10 HD
55 PLL
65 CCD- CCD-7V
CAM4.7V
CAM3V
CCD15V
54 CAM4.7V
56 CAM4.7V
49 CAM3V
51 CAM3V
53 CAM3V
59 CCD+
61 CCD+
CN1001
VIC A(7)
VIC A(6)
VIC A(5)
VIC A(4)
VIC A(3)
VIC A(2)
VIC A(1)
VIC A(0)
VIC 27M
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-1
CA P.C.B.
CN1051
CAM 4.7V
CARD3V
CARD2.5V
CLK 13.5
CAM 3V
CARD3V
CARD2.5V
V IN 3.5V
IC1005
TC7WH74FK
D-FF
IC1004
MN7GD02B5D
DSP
CAM 3V
F2CK
Q
CLK
V OUT
D
4 5
IC4004
2.5V REG
CARD3V
V IN CARD2.5V V OUT 4 5
IC1001
TA76432FC
2.2V REG
REF
2.2V
K 3 4
5 2
8
1
CAM 4.7V
IC1003
TC7WH74FK
D-FF
CAM 3V
Q1001
D
CLK
Q 2 5
8
1
TO
AUDIO-
VIDEO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
MAD(15)
MAD(14)
MAD(13)
MAD(12)
MAD(11)
MAD(10)
MAD(9)
MAD(8)
MAD(7)
MAD(6)
MAD(5)
MAD(4)
MAD(3)
MAD(2)
MAD(1)
MAD(0)
BEND INT
VD INT
V1V2
RE
DRWSEL
DAS
WEL
CAMRSTON
CAM SO1
CAM SI1
CAM SCLK1
AFIC RST
AFIC CS
THRUL
CAM 4.7V
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B.
CLK 13.5
2.2V
2.2V
CAM1.7V
CAM3V
3.5V
CAM1.7V
CAM3V
CLKOUT54M
RSTLSI
DW1
FRP
DT4 BUSY
DT4 WAKEUP
DT4 RST
DVDD3V
CAM3V
41 125 RIN9
40 RIN8
39 RIN7
38 RIN6
37 RIN5
36 RIN4
35 RIN3
34 RIN2
33 RIN1
32 RIN0
51 GIN9
50 GIN8
49 GIN7
48 GIN6
47 GIN5
46 GIN4
45 GIN3
44 GIN2
43 GIN1
42 GIN0
61 BIN9
60 BIN8
59 BIN7
58 BIN6
57 BIN5
56 BIN4
55 BIN3
54 BIN2
53 BIN1
52 BIN0
69 VD2
67 HD2
70 FCK
71 F2CK
86 VD
66 HD
103 CLK 13.5
72 F2CK
21 MADB15
20 MADB14
19 MADB13
18 MADB12
17 MADB11
16 MADB10
15 MADB9
14 MADB8
13 MADB7
12 MADB6
11 MADB5
10 MADB4
9 MADB3
8 MADB2
7 MADB1
6
62
28
27
26
63
94
95
96
220
222
223
224
225
230
231
232
233
234
235 MADB0
148 CAMRSTON
23 BEND INT
5 DSTBWE
24 VD INT
22 V1V2
2 RE
3 DRWSEL
4 DAS
YOUT7
124 YOUT6
123 YOUT5
122 YOUT4
121 YOUT3
120 YOUT2
119 YOUT1
118 YOUT0
133 COUT7
132 COUT6
131 COUT5
130 COUT4
129 COUT3
128 COUT2
127 COUT1
126 COUT0
135 INV
134 INH
138 MEGA PIX
139 DSTBO
137 BUSY
140 BLK END
202 VDDVTR1
203 VDDVTR2
204 VDDVTR3
205 VDDVTR4
206 VDDVTR5
207 VDDVTR6
208 VDDVTR7
209 VDDVTR8
210 VDDVTR9
195 YEOUT31
194 YEOUT30
193 YEOUT29
192 YEOUT28
191 YEOUT27
190 YEOUT26
189 YEOUT25
188 YEOUT24
VDDI6
VDDI5
VDDI4
VDDI3
VDDI2
VDDI1
VDD18D4
VDD18D3
VDD18D2
VDD18D1
VDD33D
VDDAM3
VDDAM2
VDDAM1
VDDRGB2
VDDRGB1
VDDCPU3
VDDCPU2
VDDCPU1
IC1005
UPD89039G8
MEGA IC
1 44 YIIN7
2 YIIN6
3 YIIN5
4 YIIN4
5 YIIN3
6 YIIN2
7 YIIN1
8 YIIN0
12 CIN7
13 CIN6
14 CIN5
15 CIN4
16 CIN3
18 CIN2
19 CIN1
20 CIN0
55 INVI
60 INHI
54 MEGA I
52 DSTB I
21 MEGA BUSY O
53 BLKEND O
10 VDD1
45 VDD2
11 VDD2-1
17 VDD2-2
33 VDD2-3
49 VDD2-4
63 VDD2-5
64 VDD2-6
YOUT7
43 YOUT6
42 YOUT5
40 YOUT4
39 YOUT3
38 YOUT2
37 YOUT1
36 YOUT0
34 COUT7
32 COUT6
31 COUT5
30 COUT4
29 COUT3
28 COUT2
27 COUT1
26 COUT0
47 INVO
46 INHO
51 MEGA O
48 DSTB O
25 MEGA BUSY I
50 MEGA BEND
23 CAMRSTON
22 THRUL
47 44 YIIN7
46 YIIN6
45 YIIN5
39 YIIN4
38 YIIN3
37 YIIN2
36 YIIN1
35 YIIN0
32 CIN7
31 CIN6
30 CIN5
29 CIN4
20 CIN3
19 CIN2
18 CIN1
17 CIN0
34 INV
33 INH
54 EXOR
3 CLK11
24 CLK22
2 HD
9 CLK13
VOUT7
43 VOUT6
41 VOUT5
40 VOUT4
28 VOUT3
27 VOUT2
22 VOUT1
21 VOUT0
56 CLK27
26 VDD1
58 VDD2
55 ENABLE
16 PALNTSC
48 PDC
7 HD RST
13 CBSEL
12 EIASMPTE
195 167 CAM Y7
171 CAM Y6
138 CAM Y5
48 CAM Y4
96 CAM Y3
170 CAM Y2
196 CAM Y1
137 CAM Y0
140 CAM C7
50 CAM C6
98 CAM C5
141 CAM C4
172 CAM C3
139 CAM C2
49 CAM C1
97 CAM C0
99 CAM V
51 CAM H
42 MEGA PIXREQ
41 DSTB
133 BLKENO
91 MEGA BEND
144 DR A13
6 DR A12
175 DR A11
57 DR A10
105 DR A9
143 DR A8
172 DR A7
56 DR A6
4 DR A5
103 DR A4
173 DR A3
142 DR A2
104 DR A1
5 DR A0
14 DR DQ15
63 DR DQ14
110 DR DQ13
62 DR DQ12
148 DR DQ11
10 DR DQ10
178 DR DQ9
108 DR DQ8
142 DR DQ7
61 DR DQ6
109 DR DQ5
149 DR DQ4
11 DR DQ3
12 DR DQ2
65 DR DQ1
112
20
21
35
22
34
33
32
31
30
29
26
25
24
23
53
51
50
48
47
42
44
42
13
11
10
8
7
5
4
2 DR DQ0
106 DR CSB
107 DR CLK
59 DR CKE
177 DR CASB
60 DR WEB
145 DR UDQM
8 DR RASB
9
19
38
37
17
16
39
18
15 DR LDQM
132 VDD22 1
100 VDD22 2
101 VDD33 1
145 VDD33 2
54 VDD33 3
111 VDD33 4
153 VDD33 5
76
1
14
27
3
9
43
49
49 VDD33 6
121 VDD33 7
161 VDD33 8
88 VDD33 9
1 DVDD PLL
M TO DT4 SCK
M TO DT4
DT4 TO M
102 AVDD PLL
VTR Y7
44 VTR Y6
192 VTR Y5
134 VTR Y4
92 VTR Y3
166 VTR Y2
43 VTR Y1
191 VTR Y0
169 VTR C7
136 VTR C6
94 VTR C5
168 VTR C4
193 VTR C3
45 VTR C2
135 VTR C1
93 VTR C0
47 VTR V
95 VTR H
25 FR A18
24 FR A17
116 FR A16
21 FR A15
183 FR A14
72 FR A13
118 FR A12
184 FR A11
23 FR A10
156 FR A9
74 FR A8
157 FR A7
119 FR A6
73 FR A5
155 FR A4
22 FR A3
154 FR A2
117 FR A1
71 FR A0
181 FR DQ15
151 FR DQ14
68 FR DQ13
113 FR DQ12
15 FR DQ11
179 FR DQ10
114 FR DQ9
69 FR DQ8
115 FR DQ7
17 FR DQ6
180 FR DQ5
16 FR DQ4
67 FR DQ3
150 FR DQ2
18 FR DQ1
19 FR DQ0
70 FR CEB
120 FR WEB
86 BTRST
160 TESTIOD6
77 MMC CS
152 FR OEB
131 CLKOUT
54 VDD25 1
7 VDD25 2
13 VDD25 3
20 VDD25 4
78 VDD25 5
33 VDD25 6
REB
DW1
CLKOUT54M
RSTLS1
MMC CS
39 VDD25 7
85 SYS RST B
29 HOST IN1
28 HOST IN0
122 HOST IO0
185 HOST SCKB
79 HOST SI
123 HOST SO
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
A5
DQ15
DQ14
DQ13
DQ12
DQ11
DQ10
DQ9
DQ8
DQ7
DQ6
DQ5
DQ4
DQ3
DQ2
DQ1
DQ0
/CS
CLK
CKE
/CAS
/WE
DQMU
/RAS
DQML
VCC1
VCC2
VCC3
VCCQ1
VCCQ2
VCCQ3
VCCQ4
VCCQ4
IC1261
F432166BPN
AF IC
IC4003
W986416DH-7
SDRAM
52 DIN8
53 DIN7
54 DIN6
55 DIN5
56 DIN4
57 DIN3
58 DIN2
59 DIN1
63 TESTIN8
64 TESTIN7
65 TESTIN6
66 TESTIN5
67 TESTIN4
68 TESTIN3
69 TESTIN2
70 TESTIN1
13 SDI
18 SDO
12 SCLK
10 XINTRST
11 XSYSRST
9 XCE
15 VCC
14 VCC
20 VCC
21 VCC
30 VCC
38 VCC
48 VCC
75 VD
74 HD
78 MCLK
IC4001
UPD65943GA-Y08-9EU
CARD I/F IC
IC4002
MBM29LV4000BC-90PBT
FLASH ROM
10
21
ADR0
11 ADR1
12 ADR2
14 ADR3
15 ADR4
9 DATA 15
8 DATA 14
7 DATA 13
5 DATA 12
4 DATA 11
3 DATA 10
1 DATA 8
2 DATA 9
47 DATA 7
46 DATA 6
45 DATA 5
44 DATA 4
43 DATA 3
42 DATA 2
41 DATA 1
40 DATA 0
38 FR CEB
39 WEB
31 CLK
17 RESETB
36 CSB
27 CARD DO
25 CARD CLK
WINK ENO
22 MEMO ENO
13 VDD1
30 VDD2
48 VDD3 CARD 3V
26 CARD DI
23 PORT2
Q4000,4001
19 A1
25 A0
13 A2
1 A3
7 A4
20 A5
14 A6
2 A7
11 A8
5 A9
17 A10
23 A11
12 A12
6 A13
18 A14
24 A15
30 A16
8 A17
15 A18
42 DQ15
35 DQ14
41 DQ13
34 DQ12
39 DQ11
33 DQ10
32 DQ8
38 DQ9
29 DQ7
47 DQ6
28 DQ5
46 DQ4
45 DQ3
27 DQ2
44 DQ1
26 DQ0
40
31 CE
FR CEB
TESTIOD6
FR OEB
DT4 RST
3 RY/BY
37 OE
10 RESET
VCC
MAIN PCB(1/9)
CARD LED
DT4 RST
DT4 WAKEUP
FRP
DT4 BUSY
M TO DT4 SCK
M TO DT4
DT4 TO M
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
IC1301
MBCG47103-111
IF-IC
IFNPSW
IF PDC
HD RST
CB SW
C BAR SEL
WINK ENO
MEMO ENO
CCD 15V
CCD-7V
CAM1.7V
CAM3V
CARD3V
DVDD3V
TO
AUDIO-
VIDEO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
CARD SCK
CARD DO
CARD CMD
IC4000
UPD84006S1-912
DT4
PLL
FCK
F2CK
CLK 13.5
CAMERA SECTION-2
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY,2002
CCD 15V
CCD -7V
CAM 1.7V
CAM 3V
CARD 3V
DVDD 3V
DATA COMMUNICATION
IC1055
PST596JNR
RESET
CAM 3V
F RST
Z RST1
Z RST2
P5V
PWM FA
PWM FB
F PSB
PWM ZA
PWM ZB
Z PSB
CAM 3V
CAM 4.7V
MAD(15)
MAD(14)
MAD(13)
MAD(12)
MAD(11)
MAD(10)
MAD(9)
MAD(8)
MAD(7)
MAD(6)
MAD(5)
MAD(4)
MAD(3)
MAD(2)
MAD(1)
MAD(0)
MAD(15)
IC1054
MN103004K
CAMERA MI-COM
MAD(14)
MAD(13)
MAD(12)
MAD(11)
MAD(10)
MAD(9)
MAD(8)
MAD(7)
MAD(6)
MAD(5)
MAD(4)
MAD(3)
MAD(2)
MAD(1)
MAD(0)
DRWSEL
DAS
CAMRSTON
BEND INT
WEL
VD INT
V1V2
THRUL
RE
AFIC RST
AFIC CS
DRWSEL
DAS
CAMRSTON
BEND INT
WEL
VD INT
V1V2
THRUL
RE
AFIC RST
AFIC CS
CAM SO1
CAM SI1
CAM SCLK1
CAM 3V
AVEF INT
IC1051
NJM2406F
ZOOM T
ZOOM W
ST ON
EF ID
CCC
STSP
Q1052
Q1053
CAM A3V
CAM 3V
ETOC DATA
REST
F PSB
Z PSB
V OUT
IC1204
UPD16877MA
MOTOR DRIVE
CAM A3V
Y PWM
P PWM
I ISW
CAM A3V
CAM 4.7V
LPF YPWM
LPF PPWM
VC
VCC 5 4
P 5V
Q162
Q1623
CONT
CAM 4.7V
VAP 5V
V OUT 4
3
VIN 5
1
3
4
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
5 FOCUS A(AA)
FOCUS-A(AB)
FOCUS B(BA)
FOCUS-B(BB)
ZOOM A(AA)
ZOOM-A(AB)
ZOOM B(BA)
ZOOM-B(BB)
FOCUS LED
FOCUS SENS
FOCUS VCC
ZOOM VCC
ZOOM LED1
ZOOM LED2
ZOOM SENS1
ZOOM SENS2
DRIVE(-)
DRIVE(+)
DUMP(-)
DUMP(+)
HALL OUT(+)
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
35
36
37
11
9
12
10
13
21
22
19
20
16
18 HALL OUT(-)
15 HALL IN(+)
17 HALL IN(-)
30 ND DRIVE+
29 ND DRIVE-
28 ND DUMP+
27 ND DUMP-
25 ND H IN-
23 ND H IN+
24 ND H OUT+
26 ND H OUT-
33 THERMO VDD
34 THERMO OUT
CN101 CN103 CN1201
TO
LENS
5 VC
MF LED
P5V
CAM 4.7V
CAM 3V
MF GND
FOCUS KEY1
FOCUS KEY0
LPF PPWM
LPF YPWM
P PSD OUT
Y PSD OUT
VAP 5V
VAP 5V
CAM 5V
MF 3V
3
1
2
9
13
15
6
10
11
12
4
CN102
4 CAM A3V
Y GY OFS
I ISW
P GY AMP
P GY OFS
Y GY AMP
2
3
5
7
9
CN104
7 ZOOM T
ZOOM W
AVREF
EFID
CCC
STSP
8
16
18
15
17
7
8
16
18
15
17
CN102
60
ND SW
CDIAL CW
AF SW
WB SW
CDIAL SW
CDIAL CCW
63
58
68
62
19
18
GAIN SW
20
22
CN101
6 ZOOM AD
CAM 3V 5
CN103
4
6
8
10
3
5
7
9
37
39
41
15
13
17
14
16
33
35
29
31
23
27
21
25
38
36
34
32
28
24
26
30
50
18
TO
CS P.C.B.
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-2
CARD P.C.B.
CN400
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-3
TRIGGER F.P.C.
CN1
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-3
C-KEY P.C.B.
CN100
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-3
R-KEY P.C.B.
CN100
CAM 3V
CAM 4.7V
CAM 4.7V
VAP 5V
CAM 3V
CAM 4.7V
57 31
123
124
196
133
195
194
14
64
82
135
179
205
30
48
63
70
116
151
166
192
103
104
126
127
76
77
97
79
73
98
128
18
17
95
101
119
139
140
96
13
11
10
3
4
6
15
2
152
19
153
155
111
136
134
206
204
193
191
190
154
109
129
130
143
142
141
21
20
1
118
176
117
112
178
177
120
121
122
99
100
102
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
28
26
113
29
52
115
114
25
50
75
74
202
203
201
69
71
72
68
67
24
23
188
189
187
148
149
110
2 9
23
4
21
5
19
7
17
24
IN1
11 IN2
10 EN1
12 EN2
13 IN3
15 IN4
14 EN3
16 EN4
IC1202
MB88347LPFV
D/A CONVERTER
IC1621
NJM2870F47
4.7V REG
2 14
3
15
10
4
5
6
7
DI OFFSET
IRIS
IE1
IE2
NE1
NE2
P GY OFS
Y GY OFS
13 CLK
12 LD
8 VDD
9 VCC
1 VM1
8 VM4
20 VM23
2
6
4
1
3
4 8
1
3
2
DO VCC
CS
DI
SK
LENS PCB MAIN PCB(2/9)
VTOC DATA
CTOV DATA
VTOC CLK
CTOV LATCH
VTOC EN
CTOV RX
CTOV EN
VIC PARALEEL
VIC FREEZE
VIC FRAME
CAMCARD OFF1
CCD ON
CTOV LATCH
VTOC EN
CTOV RX
CTOV EN
VIC PARALEEL
VIC FREEZE
VIC FRAME
CAMCARD OFF1
CCD ON
PWM FA
PWM FB
PWM ZA
PWM ZB
TO
AUDIO-
VIDEO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
TGNPSW
CN1001
TG SLEEP
TG CS
DVSW CAM
CCDRD INT
AGC RST
AGC CS
TGNPSW
TG SLEEP
TG CS
DVSW CAM
CCDRD INT
AGC RST
AGC CS
CAM SO0
24 CAM SCLK0
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-1
CA P.C.B
CN1051
IFNPSW
IF PDC
HD RST
CB SW
C BAR SEL
WINK ENO
MEMO ENO
IFNPSW
IF PDC
HD RST
CB SW
C BAR SEL
WINK ENO
MEMO ENO
CTOM DATA
MTOC DATA
CTOM CLK
CTOM RX
CTOM EN
MTOC EN
CTOM RX
CTOM EN
MTOC EN
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
CCD ON
CAM 3V
P5V
CAM 4.7V
FOCUS AA
FOCUS AB
FOCUS BA
FOCUS BB
ZOOM AA
ZOOM AB
ZOOM BA
ZOOM BB
FOCUS LED
FOCUS SENS
FOCUS VCC
ZOOM VCC
ZOOM LED1
ZOOM LED2
ZOOM SENS1
ZOOM SENS2
DRIVE-
DRIVE+
DUMP-
DUMP+
HALL OUT+
HALL OUT-
HALL IN+
HALL IN-
ND DRIVE+
ND DRIVE-
ND DUMP+
ND DUMP-
ND H IN-
ND H IN+
ND H OUT+
ND H OUT-
VC
MF LED
56 FOCUS KEY1
58 FOCUS KEY0
40 THERMO VDD
42 THERMO OUT
51 LPF PPWM
53 LPF YPWM
55 P PSD
57 Y PSD
47 P5V
49 P5V
46 CAM 4.7V
48 CAM 4.7V
52 CAM 3V
54 CAM 3V
4
6
8
10
3
5
7
9
37
39
41
15
13
17
14
16
33
35
29
31
23
27
21
25
38
36
34
32
28
24
26
30
50
18
56
58
40
42
51
53
55
57
47
49
46
48
52
54
FOCUS AA
FOCUS AA
FOCUS AB
FOCUS AB
FOCUS BA
FOCUS BA
FOCUS BB
FOCUS BB
ZOOM AA
ZOOM AA
ZOOM AB
ZOOM AB
ZOOM BA
ZOOM BB
ZOOM BA
ZOOM BB
FOCUS LED
ZOOM LED1
ZOOM LED2
Q1205
Q1206
LED RET0 LED RET0
LED RET1
IRIS CL
IRIS GAIN
LED RET0
LED RET1
IRIS CL
IRIS GAIN
I ENC
ND DRIVE
DA LD
ND ENC
LED RET2
FOCUS KEY1
FOCUS KEY0
FB TEMP
F RST
Z RST1
Z RST2
P PSD
Y PSD
Y GY AMP
P GY AMP
I ISW
Y PWM
P PWM
ZOOM AD
WB KEY
GAINSW KEY
CDIAL KEY
CDIAL CW
CDIAL CCW
NDSW KEY
AF KEY
ZOOMW KEY
ZOOMT KEY
ST ON
STSP
CCC
AVEF INT
AVEF
EF ID
I ENC
CAM SO1
CAM SCLK1
ND DRIVE
ND ENC
FOCUS KEY1
FOCUS KEY2
LED RET2
LED RET1
CAM 3V
P5
CAM 4.7V
I ENC
CAM 3V
CAM 4.7V
CAM A3V
CAM 4.7V
CAM 4.7V
IC1208
SN74HC1GOOHDCK
IC1052
S2969OADFJA
EEPROM
IC1205
NJM3414AV
Q1202
FOCUS LED
FOCUS SENS
FOCUS VCC
ZOOM VCC
ZOOM LED1
ZOOM LED2
ZOOM SENS1
ZOOM SENS2
DRIVE-
DRIVE+
DUMP-
DUMP+
HALL OUT+
HALL OUT-
HALL IN+
HALL IN-
ND DRIVE+
ND DRIVE-
ND DUMP+
ND DUMP-
ND H IN-
ND H IN+
ND H OUT+
ND H OUT-
VC
MF LED
FOCUS KEY1
FOCUS KEY0
THERMO VDD
THERMO OUT
LPF PPWM
LPF YPWM
P PSD
Y PSD
P5V
P5V
CAM 4.7V
CAM 4.7V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
IC1623
TC7W125FU
2
1 8
DRIVE-
6
5
7
3
IC1625
NJM2100V
2
3
8
1
5
6
7
IC1206
BA10324AFV
9
10
4
8
12
13
14
IC1206
BA10324AFV
6
5
7
IC1203
LMV32IM7
IC1206
3
5
1
4
IC1053
TC7W14FU
3
8
1
5
7
3
8
2
1
2
3
1
P5V
1
5
2
4
IC1204
IRIS
DRIVER
DRIVE+
HALL OUT+
HALL OUT-
HALL IN+
ND DRIVE+
ND DUMP-
ND DRIVE
HALL IN-
DUMP-
DUMP+
Q1208
IC1205
NJM3414AV
CAM 4.7V
FB TEMP
6
5
7
CAM 4.7V
ND ENC
14
13
12
4
8
10
9
ND DUMP+
ND H IN+
ND H IN-
ND H OUT+
ND H OUT-
MF LED Q1205
IC1207
BA1032AFV
FOCUS KEY1
FOCUS KEY0
THERMO OUT
IC1207
BA10324AFV
6
5
7
DA LD
EEP CS
CTOE DATA
CTOE CLK
CAM SCLK1
CAM SO1
CAM SI1
CTOM CLK
CAM SCLK0
CAM SO0
VTOC CLK
VTOC DATA
CTOV DATA
CTOM DATA
MTOC DATA
VDDH1
VDDH2
VDDH3
VDDH4
VDDH5
VDDH6
VDDB1
VDDB2
PVDD
VDD1
VDD2
VDD3
VDD4
VDD5
VREFH
AVDD
CAM 3V
CAM A3V
P5V
CAMERA SECTION-3
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY,2002
DATA COMMUNICATION
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
VCC
33
46
50
3 BATT +
FU3207
Q3204
REGULATOR
IC3201
MB3881
DC/DC CONVERTOR
CONTROL
Q3205
REGULATOR
FU3201
FU3203
FU3204
FU3205
FU3206
BATT -
BATT INFO
1
2
CN3201
BATTERY
TERMINAL
BATTERY
19 SHOE UNREG
SHOE UNREG 20
CN102 TO
SYSCON SERVO
SECTION-3
R-KEY P.C.B.
CN100
TO
SYSCON SERVO
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B.
41 VTR UNREG
LCD 3V 48
LCD 12V 49
TO
AUDIO VIDEO
SECTION-4
C-KEY2 P.C.B.
CN100
34
27
31
30
28
29
VDD(0) 50
VDD(0)-1 58
VDD(0)-2 59
DSC
ON/
OFF
CH1
43
53
CH2
CAM 1.7V
BAT INFO
SHOE UNREG
VTR UNREG
SHOE ON
DVDD 1.7V
CAM 3V
DVDD 3V
AA 3V
SDRAM 3V
HA 3V
LCD 3V
CARD 3V
CH3FB Q3206
REGULATOR
IC3202
4.7V REG
40
56
CH3
Q3207
REGULATOR
37
57
CH4
Q3215
D3201 Q3202
Q3201
Q3208
REGULATOR
Q3209
REGULATOR
21
60
CH5
DERR
CERR
Q3210
REGULATOR
5
64
CH8
15
61
CH6
11
62
CH7
T3201
D3203
D3205
Q3203
1 8
7
5
2
3
4
LPF
LPF
Q3211
Q3212
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
VIF 4.7V
DVDD 4.7V
HA 4.7V
P5V
LCD 12V
CCD 15V
CCD -7V
DRUM VS
CAP VS
LPF
VIN V OUT 5 4
TO
SYSCON SERVO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
BATT INFO
VTR UNREG
DVDD 3V
P5V
D VS
CAP VS
DERR
CERR
VTR ON
CAM ON
TO
AUDIO VIDEO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
DVDD1.7V
DVDD3V
SDRAM3V
CARD3V
VIF4.7V
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
CAM 1.7V
CAM 3V
DVDD 3V
CARD 3V
CCD 15V
CCD -7V
TO
AUDIO
VIDEO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
SHOE ON
DVDD 3V
SDRAM 3V
HA 3V
HA 4.7V
TO
AUDIO VIDEO
SECTION-5
MAIN P.C.B
LCD 3V
CH3FB
P5V
LCD12V
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
CAM3V
P5V
CCD ON
TO
AUDIO
VIDEO
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
VTR UNREG
AA 3V
P5V
DVDD 3V
DVDD 4.7V
22
16
LPF
LPF
LPF
MAIN PCB(3/9)
SYSCON-SERVO SECTION-1
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY,2002
DATA COMMUNICATION
CARD USB/SIC SIGNAL
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
D VS
CAP VS
DERR
CERR
DVDD3V
P5V
BATT INFO
VTR UNREG
VTR ON
CAM ON
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B.
TO
CAMERA-
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
DT4 RST
DT4 WAKEUP
FRP
DT4 BUSY
M TO DT4 SCK
M TO DT4
DT4 TO M
CARD LED
TO
CAMERA-
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B.
CTOM DATA
MTOC DATA
CTOM CLK
CTOM RX
CTOM EN
MTOC EN
MAIN PCB(4/9)
DMC II
CARD PCB
GYRO PCB
JACK PCB(1/3)
IC104((1/2)
TMP1942CYL
MODE MI-CO
4
30
88
60
61
119
BATT INFO
VTR ON
CAM ON
DT4 RST
3 BATT AD
V3TOM FILE TK
V3TOM PC
89 82 DT4 WAKEUP MTOV3 PC
129 97 FRP MODE TO VIC3 DATA
130 83 DT4 BUSY VIC3 TO MODE DATA
131 137 M TO DT4 SCK VIC3 SCLK
68 135 M TO DT4 VIC3 CS
128 136 DT4 TO M VIC3 REQUEST
34 CASSETTE IN SWITCH
133 CTOM DATA
13 132 MTOC DATA CASSETTE MEMORY A/D0
14 134 CTOM CLK CASSETTE MEMORY A/D1
15 84 CTOM RX CASSETTE MEMORY A/D2
105 149 CTOM EN CASSETTE MEMORY SDA
106 71 MTOC EN CASSETTE MEMORY SCL
104 CASSETTE MEMORY ON
143 10 PNL OPEN SW AVCC
127 41 PNL BT SW DVCC3-4
118 64 LCD BL ON AMO
108 59 LCD ON DVCC51
100 93 LCD DA LOAD DVCC52
7 94 LCD EEP CS DAVCC
26 63 LCD CEN DVCC3-1
56 140 SCLK1 DVCC3-2
57 138 SOUT1 AM1(BW1)
67 139 SIN1 FVCC
81 DVCC3-3
109 99 MIRR CVCC
62 EVF SEN
107 123 EVF ON E3DET
124 EVF BL ON
RESET
LI3V DETECT
XT1(QUARTZ)
XT2(QUARTZ)
CARD DET
CARD PRO
CARD OPEN
58 OSDC CS
46 NTSC XPAL
103 XRESET
72 LANC CONT
LANC OUT
E
E
P
R
O
M
R
E
S
E
T
M
O
D
E
E
E
P
R
O
M
C
S
X
2
X
1
LANC IN
32 LANC POWER ON
4
11
PW CONT
8 VCC
12
10
101
102
1
P5V
E3V
CAM A3V
DVDD 3V VTR UNREG
10 PNL OPEN SW
PNL BT SW
LCD BL ON
LCD ON
LCD DA LOAD
LCD EEP CS
LCD CEN
SCLK1
SOUT1
SIN1
36
38
37
50
47
45
44
43
46
CN101
30 LANC OUT
LANC DC 31
CN2901
CN1
30 LANC OUT
LANC DC 31
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-4
MAIN P.C.B.
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-4
C-KEY2 P.C.B.
CN100
MIRR
EVF SEN
EVF ON
EVF BL ON
SCLK1
SOUT1
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
SCLK1
SOUT1
OSDC CS
NTSC XPAL
XRESET
TO
SYCON-SERVO
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B.
CARD LED
LI3V
LANC OUT
2 CARD PRO
CARD OPEN
CARD DET
CARD DAT
CARD CLK
CARD CMD
CARD VDD
CAM A3V
Y GY OFS
Y GY AMP
3
4
8
10
12
6
14
15
16
P GY OFS 18
P GY AMP 17
I ISW 19
CN400
CAM A3V
Y GY OFS
Y GY AMP
2
3
4
P GY OFS 6
P GY AMP 5
I ISW 7
CN1601
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B.
CN104
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B.
CN104
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-1
DATA
CONT
5.6V
REG
LIMITER 14
6
98
RESET
1
92
XCS
8
2
3
4 VCC
XCK
DI
D0
SIN1
SOUT1
SCLK1
VTR
UNREG
CAM A3V
IC1604
NJU7096R
AMP
IC1603
TC7W65FU
SWITCH
IC1602
GSU-303B
GYRO
IC1601
GSU-303A
GYRO
DVDD
3.0V
P5V
DVDD 3V
DVDD 3V
X101
20MHz
IC102
TL1596CPW
LANC INTERFACE
7
3
4
VOLTAGE
DETECT
Q101
2
VOLTAGE
DETECT
8
6
5
5
114
IC100
S 8423RFS
ESV REG & RESET
VTR UNREG P5V
Q100
IC103
Q102
Q103
IC101
AK6440BH
EEPROM
Q105
Q104
E 3V
110 112
X100
30KHz
116
24
25
23
115
101 152
10
185
189
322
104
283
264
ROFS
117 ICS(2)
27 ICO(0)
198 ICO(1)
218 AIN2
138 AIN3
270 ICO(2)
REEL LED CONT
DEW
MSW AD
TAPE LED
DRUM ON
CAP ON
CAP FWD
UNLOAD
LOAD
REC PROOF
TAPE END
TAPE TOP
DA CFG
DA SREEL
26 ICLK
116 ICD
268 TCLK
288 AIN1
341 AIN0
265 PWM(7)
110 PWM(6)
231 DFG
56 DPG
66 CFG
68 RFGT
232 RFGS
CDATA(5)
CDATA(4)
153
296
PWMC
PWMD
CERR
DERR
CDATA(3)
SI(0)
SO(0)
SCLK(0)
XEINT0
SCS(0)
48 AIN 12
MIC1
MIC2
MIC3
MIC2
MIC3
MIC ON
IC2301(1/3)
MB87M125
VIC3
IC104(1/2)
TMP1942CYL
MODE MI-CO
IC301
LB11990W
MOTOR DRIVE
3V REG
3V REG
SWITCH
SW
RESET
59
58
56
23
41
30
60
U.V.W.
DRIVER
U.V.W.
DRIVER
HALL
POWER
POWER
SW
POWER
SW
VCC1
TIMING
CONT
POSITION
DETECT
16
28 PG AMP
DPG
32
31
55
35
2
44
22
PG AMP
DFG
U
COM
VCC2
V REF
W
V
U
53
FWD/RVS
SW
40
36
64
V
51
50
49
W
U+
U-
V+
V-
W+
W-
CH-
CH+
LOD-
VCC
CFG1
CFG2
LOD+
48
47
46
45
42
43
DRIVER DECORDER
SAFETY
SW
61
5
63
37
38
3
4
9
10
11
8
7
6
DVDD 3V
CAP ON
CAP FWD
UNLOAD
LOAD
Q306
S REEL FG
T REEL FG
LITHIUM 3V
D VS
DRUM ON
CAP VS
DPG
DFG
T REEL FG
S REEL FG
IC302
S817A56ANB
5.6V REGULATOR
IN OUT 3 2
VTR UNREG
DVDD 3V
DVDD 3V
DVDD 3V
CN302
1
2
3
4
10
11
9
5
6
7
U
U
V
V
W
W
COIL COM
DPG
DFG
SENS COM
CN301 DEW
SENSOR
T-REEL
CASSETTE IN SW
10
7
8
9
6
4
3
2
1
TR E
TR C
TR LED A
TR LED K
REC PRF
C IN
MIC3
MIC2
MIC1
CN402
7
6
5
3
4
2
CAM A3V
SW 400
CARD OPEN
Y GY OFS
Y GY AMP
P GY OFS
P GY AMP
I ISW
CN401
12
10
7
5
2
1
CARD DET MEMORY CARD
CARD PRO
CARD DAT
CARD CLK
CARD CMD
CARD RSV
CN304
CN303
5
4
1
LOAD(+)
LOAD(-)
LOD(+)
LOD(-)
DEW
CARD PRO
CARD DET
CN104
17
15
13
CARD PRO
CARD OPEN
CARD DET
7
8
30
31
32
33
2
1
4
3
11
10
5
9
22
24
28
29
26
27
19
18
20
13
14
15
16
17
U
21 CFG_VCC
U
V
V
W
W
U+
U-
V+
V-
W+
W-
CH+
CH-
CFG1
CFG2
SR LED A
SR LED K
SR E
SR C
B&EOT C
EOT E
BOT E
LED A
LED K
MSW VSS
S-REEL
MODE SW
TAPE
END
TAPE
TOP
MSW VCC
MSW SENS
DVDD 3V
MSW AD
DEW
DVDD 3V
Q302
MICON
DVDD 3V
P5V
BOT DET
Q303
EOT DET
MIC
Q303
Q304
TAPE LED
Q301
Q305
TAPE TOP
TAPE END
REEL LED CONT
DRUM
MOTOR
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
LOADING
MOTOR
PG
FG
FG
2
3
7
1
5
6
7
6
8
3
1
5
2
7
OUT
OUT
VCC
VCC
4
VREF
VREF
2
2
4
1
1 CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
SYSCON-SERVO SECTION-2
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY,2002
C-DIAL PCB
MAIN PCB(5/9)
R-KEY PCB(1/2)
C-KEY2 PCB(1/4)
RT FPC
C-KEY1 PCB(1/2)
REC SEARCH PCB
C-KEY3 PCB
ZOOM UNIT
TRIGGER FPC
CCW
SW151
C DIAL
SW300
MENU DIAL
CN151 CN5
3
4
5
CDIAL CCW
CDIAL CW
CDIAL SW
CN1
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
CN101 33
38
36
CDIAL CCW
31 GAIN SW
34 WB SW
CDIAL CW
CDIAL SW
40 ND SW
36 AF SW
CN1 CN101
CN1
43
48
41
CAM PW LED
45 CAM PW SW
50 VTR PW SW
VTR PW LED
AD KEY0
46 AD KEY1
37 MDIAL CCW
44 MDIAL CW
39 AD KEY2
26 PAE/GRN SW
49 CARD LED
21 LI 3V
CN103
ACCESSORY
SHOE
2
1
9
UNREG
3 UNREG
4 UNREG
UNREG
ID-1
23 FE ID
22 FE ID
21 CCC
20 AVEFI
19 STSPC
CN104
1
5
DVDD 3V
6 RMC IN
2 TALLY LED
DVDD 4.7V
LED1
1
5
DVDD 3V
6 RMC IN
2 TALLY LED
RT1
RMC
RS-181
DVDD 4.7V
CN102 CN100
3
4
S/S SW
PHOTO SW
5 H PHOTO SW
2 KEY AD4
1 KEY AD3
12 TALLY LED
22 RMC IN
13 DVDD 3V
11 DVDD 4.7V
16
19
S/S SW
PHOTO SW
15 H PHOTO SW
18 KEY AD4
17 KEY AD3
23 TALLY LED
22 RMC IN
11 DVDD 3V
12 DVDD 4.7V
CARD LED
LI3V
LANC OUT
DVDD 3V
DVDD 4.7V
7
4
9
CAM PW LED
5 CAM PW SW
2 VTR PW SW
VTR PW LED
AD KEY0
6 AD KEY1
13 MDIAL CCW
14 MDIAL CW
11 AD KEY2
26 PAE/GRN SW
1 CARD LED
29 LI 3V
47 AUTO MANUAL
CN100 CN3
4
5
12
VTR PW SW
VTR CAMERA
CAM PW SW
DE SEL
13 DE ON
14 ND SW
15 AF SW
POWER SW104
DE SEL SW100
DE ON SW101
REC SEARCH+
SW1
LED1
REC SEARCH-
SW2
PAE/GRN
SW303
M MENU
SW301
WB SEL
SW200
WB SET
SW201
CSTM PRESET
SW203
LED1
CARD LED
IC104(2/2)
TMP1942CYU
MODE MI COM
DISPLAY
SW204
ZOOM W
SW100
ZOOM T
SW101
PHOTO
SW103
REW
SW108
FF SW107
RECPAUSE
SW109
AFREC
SW110
AVINS ERT
SW111
HOLD
SW104
STOP
SW105
START/STOP
SW102
PB/STILL
SW106
AUTO MANUAL
SW302
ND ON SW102
AF ON SW103
STANDBY SW3
PHOTO SW4
START/STOP SW5
TAPE/CARD SW2
EJECT SW1
CW
PUSH
CCW
CW
PUSH
HOLD
CN1 CN8
3
2
1
DVDD 3V
CAM PW LED
VTR PW LED
6 REC+
5 REC-
CN101 CN4
CW1
LITHIUM
BATTERY CW2
4
3
6
MDIAL CCW
MDIAL CW
AD KEY2
2 PAE/GRN SW
1 AUTO MANUAL
3
2
1
CDIAL CCW
CDIAL CW
CDIAL SW
12
11
4
VTR PW SW
CAM PW SW
DE SEL
3 DE ON
2 ND SW
1 AF SW
3
2
1
DVDD 3V
CAM PW LED
VTR PW LED
6 REC+
5 REC-
4
3
6
MDIAL CCW
MDIAL CW
AD KEY2
2 PAE/GRN SW
1 AUTO MANUAL
CN2
ZOOM
T
W
2
1
3
CAM 3V
ZOOM AD
GND
4 GND
2
1
3
CAM 3V
ZOOM AD
GND
4 GND
CSTM KEY
SW202
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
CN103
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
CN102
TO
AUDIO-
VIDEO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
CN101
CN1 CN103
8
3
2
H PHOTO SW
9 PHOTO SW
10 S/S SW
STANDBY SW
TAPE/CARD SW
1 EJECT SW
CN1
6 ZOOM AD
5 CAM3V
8
3
2
9
10
1
H PHOTO SW
PHOTO SW
S/S SW
STANDBY SW
TAPE/CARD SW
EJECT SW
CN2900
3
11
9
7
VTR POW SW
CAM POW SW
T/C POW SW
ADJUSTMENT
CONNECTOR
LANC OUT
27
28
44
45
16
17
43
42
85 RMC P IN
Q109
Q107
DVDD 3V
DVDD 4.7V
51 TALLY LED
20 KEY AD3
22 KEY AD4
37 H PHOTO SW
36 PHOTO SW
38 S/S SW
VTR PW SW
CAM PW SW
CAM PW LED
VTR PW LED
Q108
Q109
KEY AD0
KEY AD1
DIAL CCW
DIAL CW
19 KEY AD2
39 PAE GRN
47 MEMORY ACCESS LED
S/S SW
PHOTO SW
H PHOTO SW
STANDBY SW
T/C SW
EJECT
38
36
37
31
29
33
DVDD 3V
DVDD 4.7V
CN100
26
10
EFID
CCC
25 AVEF
9 STSP
21 ZOOM W
14 ZOOM T
CN100
6 SHOE ID1
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
CN102
CN100
27
8
SHOE UNREG
SHOE UNREG
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
CN102
2
3
SYSCON SERVO SECTION-3
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY,2002
CARD USB/SIC SIGNAL
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
C-KEY2 PCB(2/4)
JACK FPC(2/3) MAIN PCB(6/9)
CN1 CN101
30
27
32
AV SO
AV SCLK
LM CS
28 DVDD 3V
25 LM RST
CN2901
11
14
28
AUDIO L
10 AV DET
6 S DET
5 C I/O
2 Y I/O
8 V I/O
AUDIO R
V BUS
24 D+
25 D-
11
14
28
AUDIO L
10 AV DET
6 S DET
5 C I/O
2 Y I/O
8 V I/O
AUDIO R
V BUS
24 D+
25 D-
22
23
20
AV SO
AV SCLK
LM CS
24 DVDD 3V
25 LM RST
CN2
S TERMINAL
USB JACK
CN4
CN5
AV
JACK
1 VBUS
3 D+
2 D-
3 AUTO MANUAL
CN101
DVDD 1.7V
DVDD 3V
SDRAM 3V
CARD 3V
VIF 4.7V
CN3
6
7
8
AV SO
AV SCLK
LM CS
9 DVDD 3V
10 LM RST
C-KEY1 PCB(2/2)
CN100
IC701
BU8718KV
LCD DRIVE
10
9
8
AV SO
AV SCLK
LM CS
7 DVDD 3V
6 LM RST
DI 47
CK 46
CS 45
VDD 40
RES
Q701
39
S24 27
S23 26
S22 23
S12 13
S11 11
S1 1
COM3 38
COM2 37
COM1 36
CN701
27 S24
S23
S22
S12
S11
S1
COM3
COM2
COM1
AUDIO LCD UNIT LCD
26
25
15
14
4
3
2
1
VIF 4.7V
CARD 3V
DVDD 3V
DVDD 1.7V
SDRAM 3V
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
AUD1 I
AUD1 O
WCK
LRCK
AMCK
AV SO
AV SCLK
AIF CS
LINE ATT
A MUTE
HPF ON
MIC F CONT
MIC ATT
HP CTL
INT MUTE
EXT MUTE
SP MUTE
SOUND SW
SP STBY
AUDIO L
AUDIO R
SOUND
EXT DET
HP DET
SHOE 5V ON
TO
AUDIO-
VIDEO
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
VTOC DATA
CTOV DATA
VTOC CLK
VTOC LATCH
VTOC EN
CTOV RX
CTOV EN
VIC PARALLEL
VIC FREEZE
VIC FRAME
PWM FA
PWM FB
PWM ZA
PWM ZB
CCD ON
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B
TO
SYSCOM-SERVO SECTION-3
C-KEY2 P.C.B
CN100
IC2301(2/3)
MB87M125
VIC3
227 97
148
149
62
228
41 DVDDL3
119 DVDDL2
109 DVDDL1
256 DVDDL0
55 AVDD12
73 AVDD6
344 AVDD11
221 AVDD10
287 AVDD9
299 AVDD7
90 AVDD5
173 AVDD4
309 AVDD1
352 DVDDH12
351 DVDDH11
290 DVDDH10
132 DVDDH9
278 DVDDH8
124 DVDDH7
30 DVDDH6
327 DVDDH5
22 DVDDH4
106 DVDDH3
184 DVDDH2
180 DVDDH1
254 DVDDH0
139 AVDD13
245 DVDDH15
79 DVDDH14
239 DVDDH13
345 DVDDL4
64 DVDDL5
354 DVDDL6
84 DVDDL7
258 VDDPLL1
102 VDDPLL2
VDDPLL3
9
348
347
58
147
225
19
325
192
59
259
146
20
291
216
324
284
188
14
187
271
108
42
134
145
346
224
266
194
21
111
31
248
319
298
364
233
250
85
88
249
34
275
123
332
204
33
122
32
203
121
331
31
273
202
120 EDATA(15)
43 XERD
335 EADDR(15)
126
277
37
208
127
336
36
209
128
39
337
40
210
129
279 EADDR(0)
43 XERD
/OE
CARD 3V
Q3500
Q3501
ENB
/IREQ
/CE
/WE
USB DET
11 CDATA(1)
214 XEINT2
131 XECS(1)
44 XEWRU
212 XECSLOX
186 CDATA(0)
205
16
EDATA(0)
191 SCS(1)
17 SCS(3)
321 SO(2)
261 SCLK(2)
CDATA(2) CSYNC1
VCLK 0
Y IN
CLAMP Y
C IN
VD
Y O
C O
VRL 2
VRH2
AIN13
SCS(9)
SCS(8)
SCS(7)
WIDE DET
LINE IN
WIDE CONT
LET CONT
S DET
AV DET
SCS(10)
D(5)
154
257
136
15
263
190
323
107
VIF 4.7V
DVDD 3V
2.8V
DVDD 1.7V
CARD 3V
F
R
O
M
U
S
B
SDRAM 3V
VTOC CLK
VTOC LATCH
VTOC EN
CTOV RX
CTOV EN
VIC PARALLEL
VIC FREEZE
VIC FRAME
PWM FA
PWM FB
PWM ZA
PWM ZB
CCD ON
VTOC DATA
AUTO MANUAL
SHOE 5V ON
HP DET
EXT DET
SOUND
SP STBY
SOUND SW
SP MUTE
EXT MUTE
INT MUTE
HP CTL
MIC ATT
MIC F CONT
HPF ON
A MUTE
LINE ATT
LM RST
AMCK
LRCK
WCK
AUD1 O
AUD1 I
CTOV DATA
DVDD 3V
DVDD 1.7V
Q2105
Q2100
WIDE DET
Q2104 Q2103 Q2101
Q2106
WIDE CONT
LET CONT
Q2102
48
46
36
40
21
34
17
15
7 11 20 26 31 32 37 45 47 12 13 14 19
2
4 CLAMP
Y CONT
AGC
IC2100
LD502U
VIF2
CLAMP
10
27
C CONT
AV SCLK
AVSO
VIF CS
CLAMP
AV SCLK
AV SO
VIF CS
AIF CS
LM CS
30
25
3
EQ
C SYNC SEP
Y/C SEP
VCC
L
IN
E
IN
DVDD 3V
DVDD 4.7V
27MHz
CSYNC1
VCLKO
Y IN
CLAMP Y
REC C
YD
CD
VD
LPF
BPF
SERIAL DATA
CLK DATA CS 12
13
14
11
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
11
18
19
8
7
60
63
56
3
62 /OE
ENB
USB SENSE
/IREQ
/CE
/WE
DP
DN
SOWP
/CARD DET
13
55 VDD5
CARD DAT0
CARD CLK
12 CARD CMD
2 /PONRST
54 VDD4
42 VDD3
10 VDD2
4 VDD1
D0
EADDR(0)
XERD
EDATA(15)
EDATA(14)
EDATA(13)
EDATA(12)
EDATA(11)
EDATA(10)
EDATA(9)
EDATA(8)
EDATA(7)
EDATA(6)
EDATA(5)
EDATA(4)
EDATA(3)
EDATA(2)
EDATA(1)
EDATA(0)
EADDR(1)
EADDR(2)
EADDR(3)
EADDR(4)
EADDR(5)
EADDR(0)
EADDR(1)
EADDR(2)
EADDR(3)
EADDR(4)
EADDR(5)
EADDR(6)
EADDR(7)
EADDR(8)
EADDR(9)
EADDR(10)
EADDR(11)
EADDR(12)
EADDR(13)
EADDR(14)
EADDR(15)
EADDR(16)
EADDR(17)
EADDR(18)
XEWRU
XECS(0)
D15
20
21
31
32
33
34
35
36
/DE 62
A1 37
38
39
40
43
A6 44
13
1
7
20
14
2
11
5
47
39
34
35
42
37
40 VCC
XERD
DO15
28
46
29
38
41
32
33
45
27
44
26
10 RESET
DO0
A0 25
19
17
23
12
6
18
24
30
A18
8
15
4
31
DVDD 3V
CARD 3V
IC3501
MC74HC40630TEL
SWITCH
CARD 3V
CN104
DVDD 3V
XERD
EDATA(15)
EDATA(14)
EDATA(13)
EDATA(12)
EDATA(11)
EDATA(10)
EDATA(9)
EDATA(8)
EDATA(7)
EDATA(6)
EDATA(5)
EDATA(4)
EDATA(3)
EDATA(2)
EDATA(1)
EDATA(0)
IC2903
NJM2870F28
2.8V REG
V OUT V IN 4 5 2.8V
2
1
15
10
5
3
4
15
9
CARD DO
CARD CLK
CARD CMD
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
XRESET
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
CARD DET
CARD PRO
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-2
CARD P.C.B
CN400 8
20
CARD CMD
12 CARD CLK
16 CARD DAT
CARD VDD
WIDE
DETECT
IC3500
TE4100B
USB CONTROLER
IC2300
MBM29LV800BA-90
FLASH ROM
X3500
12MHz
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY,2002
DATA COMMUNICATION
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
DIGITAL DV SIGNAL
DIGITAL (VIDEO+AUDIO SIGNAL)
3
9
14
27
43
49
11
47
48
51
53
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
21
20
15 DQML
16 /WE
17 /CAS
18 /RAS
9 /CS
37 CKE
38 CLK
39 DQMU
IC2303
W986416DH
SDRAM
ADDR(0)
ADDR(1)
ADDR(2)
ADDR(3)
ADDR(4)
ADDR(5)
ADDR(6)
ADDR(7)
ADDR(8)
ADDR(9)
ADDR(10)
ADDR(11)
ADDR(12)
ADDR(13)
10
8
13
44
50
42
45
7
5
4 MDATA(1)
MDATA(2)
MDATA(3)
MDATA(4)
MDATA(5)
MDATA(6)
MDATA(7)
MDATA(8)
MDATA(9)
MDATA(10)
MDATA(11)
MDATA(12)
MDATA(13)
MDATA(14)
MDATA(15)
2 MDATA(0)
VCC1
SDRAM 3V
VCCQ1
VCCQ2
VCC2
VCC3
VCCQ3
VCCQ4
1
163
357
303
240
162
76
233
234
70
156
199
63 REC H
UTIL SWP(5)
RDAT
XRDAT
SDLSEL
PB H
D(0)
PBRF
SWP
REC CONT
SDL
PB ON
Q2000
IC2301(3/3)
MB87M125
VIC3
DOTCLK
ICS(1)
69
91
140
53
155
220
141
175
312
292 C LKON
VF R2
VF B2
VF G2
CSYNC 0
TPA
XTPA
TPB
XTPB
VD
HD
OSD I(0)
OSD I(1)
19
14
13
8
20
15
17
18
16
OSC
5
4 3 2 1
VDD
R
E
S
E
T
D
A
T
A
C
S
C
L
K
IC2601
BU2991
CHARACTER GENERATOR
Q2301
Q2302
HD
VD
DATA IN
DATA OUT
CG FLAME
EVF R
EVF G
EVF B
R
G
B
35
34
39
42
43
45
46
40
6
21
32
36 5
339 AIN 14
356
355
161
75
302
238
160
74
82
167
244
306
81
359
243
80
305
165
358
242
164
304
360
83
169
246
362
307
168
361
241
78
MDATA(1)
MDATA(2)
MDATA(3)
MDATA(4)
MDATA(5)
MDATA(6)
MDATA(7)
MDATA(8)
MDATA(9)
MDATA(10)
MDATA(11)
MDATA(12)
MDATA(13)
MDATA(14)
MDATA(15)
MDATA(0)
ADDR(0)
ADDR(1)
ADDR(2)
ADDR(3)
ADDR(4)
ADDR(5)
ADDR(6)
ADDR(7)
ADDR(8)
ADDR(9)
ADDR(10)
ADDR(11)
ADDR(12)
ADDR(13)
DQML
XWE
XCAS
XRAS
XCS
CKE
MCLK
DQMU
6
315
314
179
255
95
3
178
ADATA(0)
ADATA(1)
ADATA(2)
ADATA(3)
ADATA(4)
ADATA(5)
ADATA(6)
ADATA(7)
257
230 151 176 353 295 93 1 177 313
VCLK 0
X
R
C
L
K
R
C
L
K
U
T
I
L

S
W
P
(
4
)
R
A
P
C
R
A
G
C
U
T
I
L

S
W
P
(
3
)
U
T
I
L

S
W
P
(
2
)
U
T
I
L

S
W
P
(
1
)
U
T
I
L

S
W
P
(
0
)
X
R
C
L
K
R
C
L
K
R
A
F
C
R
A
P
C
R
A
G
C
E
Q
F
C
E
Q

C
O
N
T
G
D
L

C
O
N
T
G
D
H

C
O
N
T
G
D
H

C
O
N
T
G
D
L

C
O
N
T
E
Q

C
O
N
T
E
Q
F
C
R
A
G
C
R
A
P
C
R
A
F
C
R
C
L
K
X
R
C
L
K
VIC A(0)
VIC A(1)
VIC A(2)
VIC A(3)
VIC A(4)
VIC A(5)
VIC A(6)
VIC A(7)
VIC 27M
CN101
TO
CAMERA
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
2
1
9
17
150
294
226
252
65
229
350
158
29 30
HA 3V
REC ON
IC2000
LD502W
VRP2
H1A
H1B
H2A
H2B
HA 4.7V
38
DVDD 3V
X2301
27MHz
13
GDL
8 11 12 22 23 25 26 28
EQ
AGC
EPH VCO
CN2902
SERVICE
CONNECTOR
1
3
PB RF
SWP
CN2000
2
3
H1A
H1B
5 H2A
6 H2B
CN2901
19
18
XTPB
TPB
20 XTPA
21 TPA
CN3
4
3
XTPB
TPB
2 XTPA
1 TPA
CN102
23 SHOE ID1
CG R
CG G
VF G
VF B
VF R
CG FLAME
CG B
CSYNC
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-5
MAIN P.C.B
DV
CONNECTOR
TO
SYSCON-SERVO SECTION-3
R-KEY P.C.B
CN100
XRESET
NTSC XPAL
OSDC CS
SOUT1
SCLK1 TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
HA 4.7V
HA 3V
SDRAM 3V
DVDD 3V
SHOE ON TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
19
18
20
21
XTPB
TPB
XTPA
TPA
JACK FPC(3/3)
MAIN PCB(7/9)
DVDD 3V
IC2303
2.8V REGULATOR
4 5 2.8V
HA 4.7V
135 XRESET
HA 3V
SDRAM 3V
DVDD 3V
DRUM
UNIT
CH-1
HEAD
CH-2
HEAD
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY, 2002
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL
34
36
32
41
26
24
23
12
11
14
15
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
31 30
7 8
27
5
23
22
2
1
25
24
21
20
9
10
4 14
29
35
40
MIC
CN801
Q801
LINE ATT MIC F CONT
EXT
LINE
5
6 7
22 21
8
17
35
20
Q704
HPF ON
5V
23
13
14
15
CR NETWORK
CR NETWORK
MIC F CONT
Q705
18 SHOE MIC L
SHOE MIC R
SHOE 5V
SNOE 5V
17
11
10
CN103
ACCESSORY
SHOE
2 MIC L1
MIC L2
MIC R1
MIC R2
5
7
4
CN102
CN101
3
4
1
2
15
14
12
13
R-KEY PCB(2/2)
MAIN PCB(8/9)
MIC VOL UNIT
MJ PCB
C-KEY2 PCB(3/4)
SHOE MIC L
SHOE MIC R
SHOE 5V
SHOE 5V
MIC L1
MIC L2
MIC R1
MIC R2
CN703
SHOE 5V
3
4
1
2
15
14
12
13
SHOE MIC L
Q702
MIC L1
MIC L2
MIC R1
MIC R2
EXT L
EXT R
MIC ATT
MIC ATT
Q703
5V
IC702
NJM4580E
MIC L1 AMP
IC703
NJM4580E
MIC L2 LPF
IC703
NJM4580E
MIC L2 LPF
SHOE MIC R
SHOE 5V
SHOE 5V
MIC L1
MIC L2
MIC R1
MIC R2
CN101 CN1
VR801
VR802
28
27
SP+
SP-
CN6
SPEAKER
1
2
SP+
SP-
24
23
CN802
23
22
21
20
19
11
10
8
MIC L1
MIC L1
MIC L2
MIC R1
MIC R2
EXT L
EXT R
EXT DET
3 HP L
2 HP R
4 HP DET
5 MIC 5V
6 MIC 5V
7 MIC 5V
9 SHOE 5V ON
MIC L1
MIC L2
MIC R1
MIC R2
1 MIC L1
MIC L2
MIC R1
MIC R2
EXT L
EXT R
EXT DET
HP L
HP R
HP DET
MIC 5V
MIC 5V
2
4
3
12
13
15
20
21
19
18
17
MIC 5V 16
SHOE 5V ON 14
CN701
SHOE 5V
Q701
Q702
CN701
MIC
CN702
DC
CN801
HEAD
PHONE
3
2
1
3
2
1
6
5
7
Q702
MIC ATT
IC702
NJM4580E
MIC R1 AMP
IC705
LA7471M
MIC AMP
IC801
LA7477M
AIF
6
5
7
Q701
MIC ATT
IC701
NJM4580E
EXT L AMP
3
2
1
Q701
MIC ATT
IC702
NJM4580E
EXT R AMP
6
5
7
MIC ATT
Q703
5V
IC704
NJM4580E
MIC R2 LPF
IC704
NJM4580E
MIC R2 LPF
3
2
1
6
5
7
5V
AA 3V
5V
Q713
Q714
Q711
Q805 Q806
Q712
Q803 Q804
Q802
LINE ATT
LINE
42
HP
ALC
EVR
45
SP
46
HP
3
48
5
ALC
47
LINE
LINE
EXT
MIC
EVR
INT MUTE
A MUTE
HP CTL
MIC ATT
EXT MUTE
SERIAL
DATA
INTERFACE AV SO
AINL+ SDT0
18 SDTI
13 SCLK
12 L/R
11 MCLK
27 VA
17 VB
16 VD
AINL-
AOUTL+
AOUTL-
DFS0
DFS1
VAA3V
IC802
AK4503
ADC,DAC
VAA3V
VAA3V
PD AD
PD DA
AOUTR+
AOUTL-
AINR-
AINR+
AV SCLK
AIF CS
2
1
3
6
AUX
EVR
SP MUTE
SOUND SW
SP STBY
4 AM
5 SUSPEND
8 SP OUT-1
9 SP OUT-2
SP IN
V+
8
6
2
4
VOL IN L
VOL OUT L
VOL IN R
VOL OUT R
AUD1 I
AUD1 O
WCK
LRCK
AMCK
AV SO
AV SCLK
AIF CS
LINE ATT
A MUTE
HPF ON
MIC F CONT
MIC ATT
HP CTL
INT MUTE
EXT MUTE
SP MUTE
SOUND SW
SP STBY
AUDIO L
AUDIO R
SOUND
EXT DET
HP DET
SHOE 5V ON
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
AA 3V
VTR UNREG
P 5V
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
P5V
V OUT V IN
IC804
TK11250CM
5V REG
IC803
NJM2166
SPEAKER AMP
5 6
V IN V OUT
IC805
NJM2870F04
REGULATOR
5 4
AA 3V
Q808,809,814
Q807
POWER OFF
MUTE
SP+
SP-
AA 3V
5V
P 5V
VOL IN L
VOL OUT L
VOL IN R
VOL OUT R
8
6
2
4
AUDIO-VIEDO SECTION-3
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY,2002
C-KEY2 PCB(4/4)
LCD PCB
CN6
3 PNL OPEN SW
PANEL OPEN SW
CN1
42
16
14
13
2
3
5
8
PNL OPEN SW
PNL BT SW
CN901
3
1
LCD 3V
PNL BT SW
LCD BT ON
LCD ON
LCD DA LOAD
LCD EEP CS
LCD CEN
SCLK1
7 SOUT1
6 SIN1
17 PANEL R
20 PANEL G
15 PANEL B
11 CSYNC1
1 LCD12V
4 LCD3V
8 VTR UNREG
CN902
14
16
15
18
10
11
7
8
PNL BT SW
LCD BL ON
LCD ON
LCD DA LOAD
LCD EEP CS
LCD CEN
SCLK1
9
SOUT1
1
SIN1
2
PANEL R
3
PANEL G
5
PANEL B
17
CSYNC
19
LCD12V
20 LCD3V
LCD3V
21 VTR UNREG
22 VTR UNREG
23 VTR UNREG
CN903
TP4201
TP4202
6
17
12
11
13
14
10
16
HVDD
VVDD
R
G
B
PCD
CSH
CSV
18 ENB
19 XENB
23 CKV1
24 CKV2
21 STV
22 XSTV
4 PCG
5 XPCG
2 CKH1
3 CKH2
7 STH
8 XSTH
25 COM
13 PNL BT SW
LCD BL ON
LCD ON
LCD DA LOAD
LCD EEP CS
LCD CEN
SCLK1
SOUT1
SIN1
PANEL R
PANEL R
PANEL G
11
12
9
17
16
20
19
18
27
26
25
PANEL B 24
CSYNC1 22
LCD 12V 10
LCD 3V 8
LCD 3V 7
VTR UNREG 6
VTR UNREG 5
VTR UNREG 4
CN2
TO
SYSCON-
SERVO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
CN101
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-5
MAIN P.C.B.
CN101
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B.
CN101
PANEL BT SW
LOAD
CLK
SO
LOAD
E CS
CLK
SO
SI
E CS
L CS
CLK
SO
SI
LCS
CLK
SO
VTR UNREG
LCD 3V
3V
LCD 12V
LCD 3V
12V
Q904
Q902
Q901
Q901
LCD 3V
LCD 12V
LCD 3V
LCD 3V
IC903
M62342FP
DA CONVERTER
CLK
V
D
D
AO2
AO1
7
DI 6
LD6 8
2
4
1
SK
VCC
2
CS 1
D1 3
D0 4
8
58
9
38
35
34
30
29
28
27
26
25
22
21
20
19
18
17
50
51
8
7
PLL
CKO
Q805
Q805
Q803
CKI
62
SYNCIN
AGC
3V
V
D
D
1
14
V
D
D
2
49
V
C
C
1
10
12
11
CLAMP
59
G
R
AGC
CLAMP
60
45
43
40
B
AGC
R OUT
G OUT
B OUT
PCD
CSH
CSV
ENB
XENB
CKV1
CKV2
STV
XSTV
PCG1
PCG2
CKH1
CKH2
STH
XSTH
COM OUT
CLAMP
CNTRST GAMMA BRIGHT SH
CEN
SCLK
DATA
TIMING
GENERATOR
IC903
LV4135W
LCD DRIVE
S
I/F
CONTROL
COM IN
IC901
AK6420AM
EEPROM
ON
4
5
3
1
IC4201
R1223W152H
DC/DC CONVERTER
Q4201
SWITCH
Q4202
DRIVER
1
5 4
2
3
VTR UNREG
LCD BL ON
LCD UNREG
39
12V
VTR UNREG
Q4203
V
C
C
P
C
D
47
V
C
C
2
12V
LCD UNIT
LCD
T4201
CPU9D25
5 6
7
1
2
3
4
CONTROL
BACK LIGHT
DATA COMMUNICATION
AUDIO VIDEO SECTION-4
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY. 2002
LCD
(CVF)
15
14
13
11
10
9
6
4
G
CN4102
R
B
HCK 1
HCK 2
HST
EN
VCK
3 VST
5 STB
1 VDD
16 COM
15
14
12
11
10
8
7
6
4
BL 5V
BL 5V
CN1501
G
R
B
HCK 1
39
33
32
35
C SYNC 1
PANLE R
CN101
PANEL G
PANEL B
HCK 2
HST
EN
3 VCK
2
MIRR
EVF BL ON
EVF SEN
SOUT 1
SCLK 1
EVF ON
VST
4 STB
VDD
13
1
COM
G
CN4101
R
B
HCK 1
HCK 2
HST
EN
VCK
VST
STB
VDD
5
6
BL 5V
BL 5V
2
3
7
9
10
11
12
14
15
13
16
4 COM
1
2
BL 5V
FN4101
LED
EVF SEN
SOUT 1
SCLK 1
EVF ON
CG R
CG FRAME
CG B
CG G
VF R
VF G
VF B
C SYNC 1
BACK
LIGHT
2
1
29
11
14
16
3
31
20
22
24
34
7
6
38
48
18 44
37
4
5
39
R IN
Q1508
Q1507
Q1509
EVF 12V EVF 3V
G IN
Q1505
Q1502
P 5V
R OUT
G OUT
B OUT
EN
HCK1
HCK2
HST
VCK
VST
B IN
OSD R
OSD G
OSD B
R
G
B
R
G
B
SCK
SDAT
SEN
BACK GROUND
C
S
Y
N
C
V
C
C
2
V
D
D
V
C
C
V
C
C IC1501
AN2536FHQ
EVF DRIVER
IC1502
MC74HC4053
SWITCH
47 25
REF
CHROMA
LPF
CONTRAST
CLAMP
BRIGHT
LOGIC
CG
MIX
TIMING
GENERATOR
16
4
9
15
10
14
11
2
13
1
3
12
5
R
G
B
R
G
B
VCC
Q1501
Q1506
Q1503
Q1503
LCD 3V
EVF 12V
CH3FB
LCD 3V
LCD 12V
P 5V
Q1510
Q1511
CH3FB
LCD 12V
EVF 12V
Q1508
Q1504
Q4102
LED
DRIVE
Q4101
LED
DRIVE
EVF 3V
MAIN PCB(9/9)
CVF P.C.B.
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION
C-KEY2 P.C.B
CN100
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO
SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B
TO
SYSCON-SERVO
SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-5
CANON INC., 2002 C
01 JULY,2002
DATA COMMUNICATION